성경 읽기

King James Version 1611 · 사도행전 24장

본문 이동

King James Version 1611 · 사도행전 24장

구약

검색

본문 검색

원어 검색 Strong · lemma · 뜻

버전 범위

본문 범위

설정

보기 옵션

화면 테마

글자 크기

글꼴

원어 보기

원어 검색 열기

주석 보기

이미지

색상 의미

본문의 색상 표시는 주석 제작자가 정의한 해석 흐름입니다.

색상 의미

기본 주석의 색상 정의입니다.

색상 의미 전체 그림

하나님/선

하나님, 성령의 가르침, 진리, 생명, 빛, 율법(계명), 좁은 길, 하나님 나라, 영생 등

하나님으로부터 오는 진리와 생명의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경에서 하나님, 말씀, 진리, 생명, 빛, 지혜, 하나님 나라 등은 서로 연결된 본질과 방향성을 나타내는 표현들로 설명됩니다. 성경은 이러한 요소들을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 흐름과 방향성으로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 진리는 생명과 연결되며 빛은 하나님께 속한 길로 표현되고 말씀에 순종하는 것은 하나님 나라에 속한 삶으로 설명됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님께 속한 진리와 생명의 방향성과 질서를 나타내는 표현들을 포함합니다.

사탄/악

사탄, 더러운 영들의 가르침, 거짓, 사망, 어둠, 불법, 넓은 길, 어둠의 권세, 멸망

하나님을 대적하는 거짓과 사망의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경은 사탄, 거짓, 미혹, 어둠, 사망, 불법, 세상 권세 등을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 방향성과 본질로 묘사합니다. 인간은 이를 존재, 거짓된 가르침, 속성, 결과, 지배 체계 등으로 구분하여 인식하지만, 성경은 이러한 요소들을 서로 연결된 의미로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 거짓은 사탄에게 속한 것으로 표현되며 어둠은 사망과 연결되고 불법은 하나님을 대적하는 길로 설명되며 세상 권세는 미혹과 멸망의 체계로 묘사됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님을 거스르는 방향성과 질서를 따르는 표현들을 포함합니다.

선을 따르는 사람

그리스도인, 순종하는 자들, 하나님의 백성, 알곡, 제자, 의인, 빛의 자녀, 진리를 따르는 자들, 생명의 길을 걷는 자들, 선한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 선을 따르는 사람의 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체에 대한 최종 판정이 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 하나님께 속한 진리, 생명, 빛, 순종의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이라도 다른 문맥에서는 연약함이나 세상성을 드러낼 수 있으므로, 파란색은 영구 신분표가 아니라 본문 단위의 해석 관점입니다. 특히 어떤 구절은 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점이 모두 가능할 수 있으며, 그런 경우에는 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다.

양면 관점

파란색 관점도 가능, 녹색 관점도 가능, 해석 관점 병존, 선한 방향의 연약함, 세상성이나 육신성의 모습, 문맥상 양면 해석

같은 구절이나 표현을 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점 모두로 해석할 수 있을 때 사용합니다. 이는 의미 자체가 불명확하다는 뜻이 아니라, 본문을 바라보는 관점에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로도, 세상성이나 육신을 따르는 모습으로도 읽힐 수 있음을 나타냅니다. 따라서 청녹색은 별도의 사람 분류나 최종 판정이 아닙니다. 해석자가 실제로 파란색으로 표시할지 녹색으로 표시할지 고민하게 되는 지점, 두 관점이 병존하는 지점을 표시합니다. 예를 들어 믿음의 방향은 선을 향하지만 본문에서는 육신적 연약함이 두드러지는 경우, 또는 한 표현이 선한 양심의 흔들림으로도 세상성의 작용으로도 읽히는 경우에 사용할 수 있습니다.

세상을 따르는 사람

악인, 불순종하는 자들, 세상의 백성, 가라지, 미혹된 자들, 어둠에 속한 자들, 육신을 따르는 자들, 거짓을 따르는 자들, 넓은 길을 걷는 자들, 악한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 세상, 육신, 불순종의 방향을 따르는 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체를 단정하기 위한 표시가 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 거짓, 어둠, 욕망, 불법, 세상 권세의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이나 같은 표현이라도 문맥에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로 읽힐 수도 있고, 세상성을 따르는 모습으로 읽힐 수도 있습니다. 그런 경우에는 녹색으로 확정하기보다 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다. 따라서 녹색은 파란색의 반대편 관점을 나타내지만, 모든 연약함을 곧바로 악으로 단정하는 색상은 아닙니다.

중립

지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 배경 정보, 상황 설명, 기록적 표현, 문맥 연결 요소, 선악 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 인물/민족 표현 등

선과 악의 축과 직접 관련 없는 중립적 의미를 나타냅니다. 성경에는 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내기보다, 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 사실, 일반적인 표현 등으로 사용되는 요소들도 존재합니다. 인간은 이를 지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 단순 상황 설명 등으로 구분하여 인식하며, 이러한 표현들은 문맥 설명을 위한 역할로 사용됩니다. 또한 문맥상 선과 악의 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 경우에는, 특정 인물이나 민족을 설명하는 표현도 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 예를 들어: 특정 지역이나 시대를 설명하는 표현이 사용되기도 하며 선과 악의 의미를 직접 포함하지 않는 일반적인 사물이나 상황이 묘사되기도 하고 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 흐름을 설명하는 표현으로 사용되기도 합니다. 또한 문맥에 따라 "이방인", "유대인", "로마인" 등의 표현 역시 선악의 의미를 직접 나타내지 않는 경우에는 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 따라서 이 색상은 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내지 않는 중립적 표현들을 포함합니다.

And after fiue dayes, Ananias the hie Priest descended with the Elders, and with a certaine Oratour named Tertullus, who enformed the gouernour against Paul.

원어

Μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

Meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέντε

한글 발음: 펜테

pente

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4002 원어 검색에서 보기 G4002
Lemma
πέντε
Strong
G4002
형태소
A-NUI
품사
형용사
다섯
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '다섯'.

원문 정의 보기

πέντε indecl., οἱ, αἱ, τά, five: Mat.14:17, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέρας

한글 발음: 헤메라스

hēmeras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατέβη

한글 발음: 카테베

katebē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2597 원어 검색에서 보기 G2597
Lemma
καταβαίνω
Strong
G2597
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
내려가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '내려가다, 내려오다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατα-βαίνω [in LXX chiefly for יָרַד ;] to go or come down, descend. __1. Of persons: Mat.3:16 24:17, Luk.2:51 6:17 10:31 17:31 19:5-6, Jhn.4:47, 49 4:51 5:7, Act.7:34 8:15 10:20 20:10 23:10 24:1, 22 Eph.4:10. before ἀπό, Mat.8:1 14:29 27:40, 42 Mrk.3:22 15:30, Luk.10:30, Jhn.6:38, Act.25:7, 1Th.4:16; ἐκ, Mat.17:9; ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ, Mat.28:2, Mrk.9:9, Jhn.1:32 3:13 6:33, 41-42 6:50-51, 58 Rev.10:1 18:1 20:1; εἰς, Mrk.1:10, Luk.10:30 18:14, Jhn.2:12, Act.7:15 8:38 14:25 16:8 18:22 25:6, Rom.10:7, Eph.4:9; ἐπί, with accusative loc., Jhn.6:16; with accusative of person(s), Luk.3:22, Jhn.1:33, 51; ἐν, Jhn.5:4; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Act.10:21 14:11, Rev.12:12. __2. Of things: σκεῦος, Act.10:11 11:5; βροχή, Mat.7:25, 27; λαῖλαψ, Luk.8:23; before ἀπό, Luk.9:54, Act.8:26, Jas.1:17; ἐπὶ τ. γῆν, Luk.22:44 (WH, R, mg., reject); ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ before ἀπό, Rev.3:12 21:2, 10; id. before εἰς, Rev.13:13; ἐπί, with accusative of person(s), Rev.16:21. Fig., κ. ἕως ᾄδον, Mat.11:23, Luk.10:15, WH, txt., Tr., mg. (καταβιβασθήση, T, WH, mg., RV), (cf. συν-καταβαίνω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀρχιερεὺς

한글 발음: 아르키에레우스

archiereus

원어 사전 정의 보기 G749 원어 검색에서 보기 G749
Lemma
ἀρχιερεύς
Strong
G749
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
대제사장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '대제사장'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀρχιερεύς, -έως, ὁ, [in LXX for כּ'' הָרֹאשׁ,כּ'' הַגָּדוֹל ,כּהֵן ;] __1. high-priest: Mrk.2:26 14:47, al.; of Christ: Heb.2:17 3:1, al. __2. In pl., chief priests, including ex-high-priests and members of high-priestly families: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:31, al. (Cremer, 294; DCG, i, 297f.; MM, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἁνανίας

한글 발음: 하나니아스

Hananias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G367 원어 검색에서 보기 G367
Lemma
Ἀνανίας
Strong
G367
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
아나니아
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '아나니아'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἀνανίας (WH, Ἁναν-), -α, ὁ (Heb. חֲנַנְיָה), Ananias; __1. of Jerusalem: Act.5:1, 3 5:5. __2. Of Damascus: Act.9:10-13, 17 22:12. __3. High Priest: Act.23:2 24:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρεσβυτέρων

한글 발음: 프레스뷔테론

presbuterōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4245 원어 검색에서 보기 G4245
Lemma
πρεσβύτερος
Strong
G4245
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
장로/연장자
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사·명사 '나이 든, 장로'.

원문 정의 보기

πρέσβυς, -εως, ὁ poët. form of πρεσβύτης (which see), [in LXX (= πρεσβευτής, an ambassador): Num.21:20 (21), al. (מֲלְאָךְ), Isa.13:8 57:9 (צִיר), 1Ma.9:70, al. ;] an old man. Compar., πρεσβύτερος, -α, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for זָקֵן ;] __1. of age, elder: ὁ νἱὸς ὁ π., Luk.15:25; as subst., opposite to νεανίσκοι, Act.2:17; to νεώτερος, 1Ti.5:1-2; of the religious leaders of the past, Mat.15:2, Mrk.7:3, 5, Heb.11:2 (= οἱ πατέρες, Heb.1:1). __2. Of dignity, rank or office (as found in π. and Inscr. of civil and religious offices, including priesthood, in Asia Minor and in Egypt; see Deiss., BS, 154 ff., 233 If.; LAE, 373); __(a) among Jews: Mat.16:21 26:47, 57 27:3, 12 27:20, 41 28:12, Mrk.8:31 11:27 14:43, 53 15:1, Luk.7:3 9:22 20:1 22:52, Jhn.8:9, Act.4:5, 8 4:23 6:12 23:14 24:1; τ. Ἰουνδαίων, Act.25:15; τ. λαοῦ, Mat.21:23 26:3 27:1; __(b) among Christians: Act.11:30 14:23 15:2, 4 15:6, 22-23 16:4 21:18, 1Ti.5:17 5:19, Tit.1:5, II Jn 1, 3Jn.1, 1Pe.5:1 5:5; τ. ἐκκλησίας, Act.20:17, Jas.5:14; __(with) in the visions of the Apocalypse: Rev.4:4, 10 5:5-6, 8 5:11, 14 7:11, 13 11:16 14:3 19:4. (On the NT use of this word and its relation to ἐπίσκοπος (which see), cf. Lft., Phi., 93 ff., 189 ff.; CGT, Past. Epp., lvi ff.) † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τινῶν

한글 발음: 티논

tinōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-GPM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ῥήτορος

한글 발음: 레토로스

rhētoros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4489 원어 검색에서 보기 G4489
Lemma
ῥήτωρ
Strong
G4489
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
변호사/대변인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '연설가, 변호사, 대변인'.

원문 정의 보기

ῥήτωρ, -ορος, ὁ a public speaker, an orator: Act.24:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Τερτύλλου

한글 발음: 테르튈루

Tertullou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5061 원어 검색에서 보기 G5061
Lemma
Τέρτυλλος
Strong
G5061
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
더둘로
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 인명 '더둘로'.

원문 정의 보기

Τέρτυλλος, -ου, ό Tertullus: Act.2:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τινός,

한글 발음: 티노스

tinos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-GSM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἵτινες

한글 발음: 호이티네스

oitines

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3748 원어 검색에서 보기 G3748
Lemma
ὅστις
Strong
G3748
형태소
R-NPM
품사
-
~하는 자(무릇)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '무릇 ~하는 자/것'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι (also written ὅ, τι and ὅτι; see LS, see word; WH, §411; Tdf., Pr., 111), in NT scarcely ever except in nom. (M, Pr., 91), the only instance of the oblique cases being found in ἕως ὅτου (see: ἕως), relative of indef. reference (related to simple ὅς as Lat. quisquis to qui), whoever, anyone who; __(a) of an indef. person or thing: in general statements, Mat.5:39, 41 13:12, and freq., Luk.14:27, Gal.5:4, al.; in relative sentences, Mat.7:26, Luk.15:7, Php.3:7, al.; πᾶς, with indic., Mat.7:24 10:32; ὅ ἄν (ἐάν), with subjc., Mat.12:50 13:12, Jhn.14:13, 1Co.16:2, Gal.5:10, al.; __(b) of a definite person or thing, indicating quality, "either generic, which, as other like things, or essential, which by its very nature" (Hort on 1Pe.2:11), who is such as: Mat.2:6 7:26, Luk.2:10 7:37, Jhn.8:53, Act.7:53, Rom.6:2, 1Co.3:17, Gal.4:24, Eph.1:23, al.; __(with) where the relative sentence expresses a reason, consequence, etc. (M, Pr., 92), seeing that he (it, they), and he (it, they): Luk.8:3 10:42, Act.10:47 11:28, Php.4:3, al.; __(d) as in Ionic and late Greek (Bl., §50, 1; M, Pr., l.with), differing but little from ὅς: Luk.2:4 9:30, Act.17:10, Rev.12:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐνεφάνισαν

한글 발음: 에네파니산

enephanisan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1718 원어 검색에서 보기 G1718
Lemma
ἐμφανίζω
Strong
G1718
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
나타내다/알리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나타내다, 보이다, 고발하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐμφανίζω [in LXX for יָדַע hi., etc. ;] __1. to manifest, exhibit: ἐαυτόν, with dative of person(s), Jhn.14:21-22 (DCG, ii, 112b). Pass. and mid., to show oneself, appear: Mat.27:53, Heb.9:24 (cf. MM, Exp., xii). __2. to declare, make known: before ὅτι, Heb.11:14; with dative of person(s), Act.23:15; with accusative of thing(s), before πρός, Act.23:22; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Act.24:1 25:2; περί, Act.25:15.† SYN.: δηλόω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡγεμόνι

한글 발음: 헤게모니

hēgemoni

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2232 원어 검색에서 보기 G2232
Lemma
ἡγεμών
Strong
G2232
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
총독/통치자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '총독, 통치자, 다스리는 자'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ (ἡγέομαι) [in LXX for אַלּוּף, שַׂר, etc. ;] __1. a leader, guide. __2. a commander. __3. a governor of a province (pro­consul, proprietor, legate, or procurator; but cf. ἀνθύπατος): Mat.10:18, Mrk.13:9, Luk.21:12, 1Pe.2:14; of the Procurator of Judæa, Mat.27:2, 11 27:14-15, 21 27:27 28:14, Luk.20:20, Act.23:24, 26 23:33 24:1, 10 26:30. __4. For Heb. אַלְפֵי (LXX, χίλιαι) misread אַלֻּפֵי, leaders: Mat.2:6 (OT).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Παύλου.

한글 발음: 파울루

Paulou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3972 원어 검색에서 보기 G3972
Lemma
Παῦλος
Strong
G3972
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
바울
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '바울'.

원문 정의 보기

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus), __1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7. __2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And when he was called foorth, Tertullus began to accuse him, saying, Seeing that by thee we enioy great quietnesse, and that very worthy deeds are done vnto this natio by thy prouidence:

원어

κληθέντος

한글 발음: 클레텐토스

klēthentos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2564 원어 검색에서 보기 G2564
Lemma
καλέω
Strong
G2564
형태소
V-APP-GSM
품사
동사
부르다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '부르다, 일컫다, 초청하다'.

원문 정의 보기

καλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for קרא ;] __1. to call, summon: with accusative of person(s), Mat.20:8 25:14, Mrk.3:31, Luk.19:13, Act.4:18; before ἐκ, Mat.2:15 (LXX); metaphorically, 1Pe.2:9. __2. to call to one's house, invite: Luk.14:16, 1Co.10:27, Rev.19:9; εἰς τ. γάμους, Mat.22:3, 9 Luk.14:8, 9 Jhn.2:2; ὁ καλέσας, Luk.7:39; οἱ κεκλημένοι, Mat.22:8; metaphorically, of inviting to partake of the blessings of the kingdom of God (Dalman, Words, 118f.): Rom.8:30 9:24, 25 1Co.7:17, 18; before εἰς, 1Co.1:9, 1Th.2:12, 1Ti.6:12; ὁ καλῶν (καλέσας), of God, Gal.1:6 5:8, 1Th.5:24, 1Pe.1:15, 2Pe.1:3; οἱ κεκλκλημένοι, Heb.9:15; before ἐν (ἐπί), 1Co.7:15, Gal.5:13, Eph.4:4, 1Th.4:7; κλήσει, Eph.4:1, 2Ti.1:9. __3. to call, name call by name: pass., Mat.2:23, Luk.1:32, al.; καλούμενος, Luk.7:11, Act.7:58, al.; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 210), Luk.6:15 22:3 23:33, Act.10:1, Rev.12:9, al.; with pred nom., Mat.5:9, Luk.1:35, Rom.9:26, Jas.2:23, 1Jn.3:1. (Cf. ἀντι-, ἐν-, εἰσ- (-μαι), ἐπι-, μετα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, προ-, προσ-, συν-καλέω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤρξατο

한글 발음: 에르크사토

ērxato

원어 사전 정의 보기 G757 원어 검색에서 보기 G757
Lemma
ἄρχω
Strong
G757
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
다스리다/시작하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사. 능동 '다스리다', 중간태 '시작하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄρχω [in LXX for חָלַל, מָשַׁל, etc. ;] __1. to begin. __2. to rule (see DCG, ii, 538b.): with genitive, Mrk.10:42, Rom.15:12. Mid., to begin: before ἀπό, Mat.16:21 20:8, Luk.14:18 23:5 24:27, 47, Jhn.8:9, Act.1:22 8:35 10:37, 1Pe.4:17; with inf., an Aramaic pleonasm, Mrk.1:45 2:23 5:17, Luk.3:8, al. (see M, Pro.14:1-35 f.; Dalman, Words, 27; MM, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατηγορεῖν

한글 발음: 카테고레인

katēgorein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2723 원어 검색에서 보기 G2723
Lemma
κατηγορέω
Strong
G2723
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
고발하다/고소하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고발하다, 고소하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατηγορέω, -ῶ (κατά, ἀγορεύω), [in LXX: Dan LXX 6:5, (9), 1Ma.7:6 1Mac 7:25, 2Ma.4:47 2Mac 10:13 2Mac 10:21, 4Ma.9:14 * ;] to make accusation, accuse, __(a) in general: absol., Rom.2:15; with genitive of person(s) (cl., WM, 254), Jhn.5:45; irreg. with accusative of person(s), Rev.12:10; __(b) before a judge: absol., Act.24:2, 19; with genitive of person(s), Mat.12:10, Mrk.3:2, Luk.6:7 11:54 (WH, txt., R, om.), Luk.23:2, 10, Jhn.8:6 Act.25:5 28:19; id. with accusative of thing(s) (cl., but see WM, l.with), Mrk.15:3-4; with genitive of thing(s) (Dem.), Act.24:8 25:11; before περί, with genitive of thing(s) (Thuc., viii, 85), Act.24:13; with accusative of thing(s), before κατά with genitive of person(s) (WM, § 28, 1), Luk.23:14. Pass. (B1., § 54, 3), before ὑπό with genitive, Mat.27:12, Act.22:30; ὁ κατηγορούμενος, Act.25:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Τέρτυλλος

한글 발음: 테르튈로스

Tertullos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5061 원어 검색에서 보기 G5061
Lemma
Τέρτυλλος
Strong
G5061
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
더둘로
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 인명 '더둘로'.

원문 정의 보기

Τέρτυλλος, -ου, ό Tertullus: Act.2:1-2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγων·

한글 발음: 레곤

legōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολλῆς

한글 발음: 폴레스

pollēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-GSF
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰρήνης

한글 발음: 에이레네스

eirēnēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1515 원어 검색에서 보기 G1515
Lemma
εἰρήνη
Strong
G1515
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
평화/화평
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '평화, 화평, 평안'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰρήνη, -ης, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for שָׁלוֹם ;] peace; __1. of public peace, freedom from war: Luk.14:32, Act.12:20 24:2; of the church, Ac 9:31. __2. Of peace between persons, concord, agreement : Mat.10:34, Luk.12:51, Rom.14:17, 1Co.7:15, Gal.5:22, Jas.3:18; ζητεῖν εἰ., 1Pe.3:11; διώκειν, 2Ti.2:22; ib. before μετὰ πάντων, Heb.12:14; by meton., of him who brings peace, Eph.2:14. __3. As in LXX (= Heb. שָׁלוֹם, Aram. שְׁלָם), of a state of security and safety: Jhn.16:33, Rom.2:10, 1Th.5:3,́ whence the formulae, ὕπαγε (πορεύου) εἰς εἰ, Mrk.5:34, Luk.7:50 (cf. 1Ki.1:17, al.; לְכִי לְשָׁלוֹם); εἰ. ὑμῖν (שָׁלוֹם לָכֶם), Jhn.20:19, 21, 26; ἀπολύειν ἐν εἰ., Luk.2:29, cf. 1Co.16:11; ἡ εἰ. ὑμῶν, Mat.10:13, Luk.10:6; υἱὸς εἰρήνης, ib. __4. Of spiritual peace, the peace of Christ's kingdom (DCG, ii, 330f.): Luk.1:79 2:14 Jhn.16:33, Rom.2:10 5:1 8:6, al.; ὁ κύριος τῆς εἰ., 2Th.3:16; ὁ θεὸς τῆς εἰ., Rom.15:33 16:20, 2Co.13:11, al.; in epistolary salutations, Rom.1:7, 1Co.1:3, Gal.1:3, 1Th.1:1, 1Pe.1:2, 2Jo.3, Rev.1:4, al. (see Cremer, 244). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τυγχάνοντες

한글 발음: 튕카논테스

tugchanontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5177 원어 검색에서 보기 G5177
Lemma
τυγχάνω
Strong
G5177
형태소
V-PAP-NPM
품사
동사
얻다/일어나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '얻다, 만나다; 우연히 ~하다'.

원문 정의 보기

τυγχάνω [in LXX: Deu.19:5 (מָצָא), Job.3:21 7:2 17:1, Pro.30:23 (without definite Heb. equiv.), Wis.15:19, 1Ma.11:42, 3Ma.3:7, al. ;] __I. Trans. __1. to hit (opposite to ἁμαρτάνω, to miss the mark: Hom., Xen., al.). __2. to hit upon, light upon; __(a) of persons, to meet with, fall in with: absol., ptcp., ὁ τυχών, a chance person, anyone (Lat. quivis), οὐ τυχών, not common or ordinary, Act.19:11 28:2; __(b) of things, to reach, get, obtain: with genitive of thing(s) Luk.20:35, Act.24:3 26:22 27:3, 2Ti.2:10 Heb.8:6 11:35. __II. Intrans., to happen; of things, to happen, chance, befall: impers., εἰ τύχοι, it may be, perhaps, 1Co.14:10 15:37; so ptcp., τυχόν (old accusative absol.; see M, Pr., 74), 1Co.16:6 (cf. ἐν-, ὑπερ-εν-, ἐπι-, παρα-, συν-τυγχάνω).† τυχόν, adv., see: τυγχάνω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σοῦ

한글 발음: 수

sou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διορθωμάτων

한글 발음: 디오르토마톤

diorthōmatōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1357 원어 검색에서 보기 G1357
Lemma
διόρθωσις
Strong
G1357
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
개혁/바로잡음
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '개혁, 바로잡음, 개선의 때'.

원문 정의 보기

διόρθωσις, -εως, ἡ (see supr.), __1. a making straight. __2. a reforming, reformation (used in late writers of laws, etc.): Heb.9:10 (Cremer, 807).† διόρθωμα, -τος, τό (διορθόω, to make straight, set right), a correction, reform: Act.24:3.† διόρθωσις, -εως, ἡ (see supr.), __1. a making straight. __2. a reforming, reformation (used in late writers of laws, etc.): Heb.9:10 (Cremer, 807).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γινομένων

한글 발음: 기노메논

ginomenōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1096 원어 검색에서 보기 G1096
Lemma
γίνομαι
Strong
G1096
형태소
V-PNP-GPN
품사
동사
되다/일어나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '되다, 생기다, 일어나다, 발생하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.), [in LXX chiefly for היה ;] __1. of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jhn.1:15 8:58, 1Co.15:37; a first appearance in public, Mrk.1:4, Jhn.1:6, al.; before ἐκ (of birth), Rom.1:3, Gal.4:4; διά, Jhn.1:3; βροντή, Jhn.12:29; σεισμός, Rev.6:12; γογγυσμός, Act.6:1; χαρά, Act.8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Luk.22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Mrk.11:19; πρωΐα, Mat.27:1; νύξ, Act.27:27. __2. Of events, to come to pass, take place, happen: Mat.5:18, Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:20 2:15, Act.4:21, 2Ti.2:18, al.; μὴ γένοιτο [LXX for חָלִילָה, Jhn.22:29, al.], far be it, God forbid: Rom.3:4 (ICC, in l.), 1Co.6:15 and frequently in Pl.; καὶ ἐγένετο, ἐγένετο δέ ([in LXX for וַיְהִי ;] see Burton, 142 f.; M, Pr., 16f.; Dalman, Words, 32 f.; Robertson, Gr., 1042 f.), with indic, Mat.7:28, Luk.1:8, al.; before καί and indic., Luk.8:1, Act.5:7, al.; with accusative and inf., Mrk.2:23, Luk.3:21, al.; ὡς δὲ ἐγένετο, before τοῦ with inf., Act.10:25; with dative of person(s), to befall one: with inf., Act.20:16; with accusative and inf., Act.22:6; with adv., εὖ, Eph.6:3; τ́ ἐγένετο αὐτῷ (Field, Notes, 115), Act.7:40 (LXX); before εἰς, Act.28:6. __3. to be made, done, performed, observed, enacted, ordained, etc.: Mat.6:10 19:8, Mrk.2:27 11:23, Act.19:26, al.; before διά with genitive, Mrk.6:2, Act.2:43; ὑπό, Luk.13:17; ἐκ, Luk.4:23; ἐν, 1Co.9:15; ἀπογραφή, Luk.2:2; ἀνάκρισις Act.25:26; ἄφεσις, Heb.9:22; ὁ νόμος, Gal.3:17; τὸ πάσχα, Mat.26:2. __4. to become, be made, come to be: with pred., Mat.4:3, Luk.4:3, Jhn.2:9, 1Co.13:11, al.; before ὡς, ὡσεί, Mat.10:25, Mrk.9:26; εἰς (M, Pr., 71f.), Mrk.12:1o, al.; with genitive Rev.11:15; id., of age, Luk.2:42; with dative, γ. ἀνδρί ([LXX for הָיָה לְאִישׁ, Rut.1:12, al. ;] see Field, Notes, 156), Rom.7:3, 4; before ἐν, Act.22:17, Rev.1:10, al.; ἐπάνω, Luk.19:19; μετά, with genitive, Mrk.16:[10], Act.9:19; before εἰς, ἐπί (Field, Notes, 135), κατά (ib., 62), with accusative of place, Act.20:16 21:35 27:7, al.; before ἐκ, Mrk.9:7, Luk.3:22, 2Th.2:7, al. Aoristic pf. γέγονα (M, Pr., 52, 145f.; Field, Notes, 1f.), Mat.25:6, Luk.10:36, al. Aor. ἐγενήθη (for ἐγένετο, M, Pr., 139f.; Mayser, 379), Mat.11:23, al. (Cf. απο-, δια-, επι-, παρα-, συμ-, παρα-, προ-.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔθνει

한글 발음: 에트네이

ethnei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1484 원어 검색에서 보기 G1484
Lemma
ἔθνος
Strong
G1484
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
이방인/민족
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '민족, 백성'; 복수로 '이방인'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔθνος, -ους, τό, [in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;] __1. a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.). __2. a nation, people: Mat.21:43 24:7, Mrk.13:8, Luk.22:25, Act.10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Luk.7:5 23:2, Jhn.11:48, 50-53 18:35, Act.10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19. __3. In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mat.4:15 6:32, Act.26:17, Rom.3:29 11:11 15:10, Gal.2:8, al.; of Gentile Christians, Rom.11:13 15:27 16:4, Gal.2:12, 14, Eph.3:1. SYN.: λαός (see DCG, ii, 229; Cremer, 226). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτῳ

한글 발음: 투토

toutō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-DSN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σῆς

한글 발음: 세스

sēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
S-2SGSF
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προνοίας

한글 발음: 프로노이아스

pronoias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4307 원어 검색에서 보기 G4307
Lemma
πρόνοια
Strong
G4307
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
미리 살핌/배려
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '미리 살핌, 선견, 배려'.

원문 정의 보기

πρόνοια, -ας, ἡ (πρόνοος, careful) [in LXX: Dan LXX 6:18 (19) Wis.14:3 17:2, 4Mac.6:1-35 * ;] foresight, forethought: Act.24:3; π. ποιεῖσθαι, with genitive (Dem., 546, 6), make provision for, show care for: Rom.13:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Wee accept it alwayes, and in all places, most noble Felix, with all thankfulnesse.

원어

πάντῃ

한글 발음: 판테

pantē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3839 원어 검색에서 보기 G3839
Lemma
πάντῃ
Strong
G3839
형태소
ADV
품사
-
항상/모든 면에서
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '모든 면에서, 어디서나, 항상'.

원문 정의 보기

πάντῃ (Rec. -τη), adv. (πᾶς), [in LXX: Sir.50:22, 3Ma.4:1 * ;] every way, entirely: Act.24:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πανταχοῦ

한글 발음: 판타쿠

pantachou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3837 원어 검색에서 보기 G3837
Lemma
πανταχοῦ
Strong
G3837
형태소
ADV
품사
-
어디서나
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '어디서나, 곳곳에'.

원문 정의 보기

πανταχοῦ adv., [in LXX: Isa.42:22 (כָּלַם)* ;] everywhere: Mrk.1:28 16:20, Luk.9:6, Act.17:30 24:3 28:22, 1Co.4:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποδεχόμεθα,

한글 발음: 아포데코메타

apodechometha

원어 사전 정의 보기 G588 원어 검색에서 보기 G588
Lemma
ἀποδέχομαι
Strong
G588
형태소
V-PNI-1P
품사
동사
영접하다/받아들이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '환영하다, 받아들이다, 인정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-δέχομαι [in LXX: Tob.7:17, Jdth.13:13; Jdt.13.1, 4Mac.10:1-21 * ;] to accept gladly, welcome, receive: Luk.8:40 9:11, Act.18:27 21:17 28:30; metaphorically, with accusative of thing(s), Act.2:41 24:3 (MM, see word; Cremer, 688).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κράτιστε

한글 발음: 크라티스테

kratiste

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2903 원어 검색에서 보기 G2903
Lemma
κράτιστος
Strong
G2903
형태소
A-VSM
품사
형용사
각하/존귀하신
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '가장 높으신, 각하' (존칭).

원문 정의 보기

κράτιστος, -η, -ον superl, of κρατύς (Hom.), __1. strongest, mightiest (Hom.). __2. noblest, best (cf. κρείσσων), most excellent (find., Soph., al.): voc., κρατίστε, as title of honour and respect (DCG, ii, 727a), Luk.1:3, Act.23:26 24:3 26:25.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ,

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-VSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πάσης

한글 발음: 파세스

pasēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-GSF
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὐχαριστίας.

한글 발음: 에우카리스티아스

eucharistias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2169 원어 검색에서 보기 G2169
Lemma
εὐχαριστία
Strong
G2169
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
감사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '감사, 감사함'.

원문 정의 보기

εὐχαριστία, -ας, ἡ (εὐχάριστος), [in LXX: Est.8:13, Wis.16:28, Sir.37:11, 2Ma.2:27 * ;] __1. thankfulness, gratitude (Polyb.; Es, Sir, 2Mac, ll. with): Act.24:3. __2. giving of thanks, thanksgiving (so in π. and Inscr.; M, Th., 41 f.): 1Co.14:16, 2Co.4:15, Eph.5:4, Php.4:6, Col.2:7 4:2, 1Th.3:9, 1Ti.4:3-4, Rev.4:9 7:12; with dative of person(s), 2Co.9:11 (cf. τ. θεοῦ, Wis, l.with); pl., 2Co.9:12, 1Ti.2:1 (Cremer, 904).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Notwithstanding, that I be not farther tedious vnto thee, I pray thee, that thou wouldest heare vs of thy clemencie a few words.

원어

ἵνα

한글 발음: 히나

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

한글 발음: 에피

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πλεῖόν

한글 발음: 플레이온

pleion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4119 원어 검색에서 보기 G4119
Lemma
πλείων, πλεῖον
Strong
G4119
형태소
A-ASN-C
품사
형용사
더 많은/더 큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '더 많은, 더 큰' (πολύς의 비교급).

원문 정의 보기

πλέον, see: πολύς. πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σε

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγκόπτω,

한글 발음: 엥콥토

egkoptō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1465 원어 검색에서 보기 G1465
Lemma
ἐγκόπτω
Strong
G1465
형태소
V-PAS-1S
품사
동사
막다/방해하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막다, 방해하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγκόπτω, see: ἐνκ-. ἐν-κόπτω (Rec. ἐγκ-, see: ἐν; and in I Pe, l.with, ἐκκ-); 1. to cut into (as in breaking up a road), hence, 2. to hinder: with accusative Act.24:4, 1Th.2:18, . inf., Gal.5:7; before τοῦ, with inf., Rom.15:22; εἰς τό, with inf, 1Pe.3:7.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρακαλῶ

한글 발음: 파라칼로

parakalō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3870 원어 검색에서 보기 G3870
Lemma
παρακαλέω
Strong
G3870
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
권면하다/위로하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '권하다, 위로하다, 간청하다, 부르다'.

원문 정의 보기

παρακαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for נחם ni., pi. ;] __1. to call to one, call for, summon: Act.28:20 (R, mg.; R, txt., entreat); hence (of the gods: Dem., Xen., al.), to invoke, call on, beseech, entreat: τ. πατέρα μου, Mat.26:53; τ. κύριον, 2Co.12:8; in late writers (Polyb., Diod., al.; rarely in LXX; in π., see Deiss., LAE, 176.14), also of men: absol., Phm 9; with accusative, Mat.8:5, Mrk.1:40, Act.16:9, al.; with inf., Mrk.5:17, Luk.8:41, Act.8:31, al.; before ἵνα (see M, Pr., 205, 208), Mt 14"36, Mrk.5:18, Luk.8:31, al. __2. to admonish, exhort: absol., Luk.3:18, Rom.12:8, 2Ti.4:2, al.; with accusative, Act.15:32, 1Th.2:11, Heb.3:13, al.; id. before inf., Act.11:23, Rom.12:1, Php.4:2, 1Th.4:10, al.; before ἵνα (see M, Pr., l.with), 1Co.1:10, 2Co.8:6, 1Th.4:1, al. __3. to cheer, encourage, comfort (Plut., LXX: Jb 43, Isa.35:3, Sir.43:24, al.): with accusative, 2Co.1:6, Eph.6:22, Col.2:2, al.; id. before ἐν, 1Th.4:18; διά, 2Co.1:4; pass., Mat.5:4, Luk.16:25, Act.20:12. SYN.: παραμυθέω (cf. M, Th., 25). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκοῦσαί

한글 발음: 아쿠사이

akousai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σε

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμῶν

한글 발음: 헤몬

hēmōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GP
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

συντόμως

한글 발음: 쉰토모스

suntomōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4935 원어 검색에서 보기 G4935
Lemma
συντόμως
Strong
G4935
형태소
ADV
품사
-
간략히
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '간략히, 간단히'.

원문 정의 보기

συν-τόμως, adv. (συντέμνω) [in LXX: Pro.13:23 23:28, 3Ma.5:25 * ;] concisely, briefly: Act.24:4 (for a similar ex., see MM, xxiv).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σῇ

한글 발음: 세

sēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
S-2SDSF
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπιεικείᾳ.

한글 발음: 에피에이케이아

epieikeia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1932 원어 검색에서 보기 G1932
Lemma
ἐπιείκεια
Strong
G1932
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
온유
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '온유, 관용, 너그러움'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπιεικία (Rec. -είκεια), -ας, ἡ (ἐπιεικής), [in LXX: Wis.2:19 12:18 Bar.2:27, from LXX Bar.4:24, TH (3:42), 2Ma.2:22 2Mac 10:4, 3Ma.3:15 3Mac 7:6 * ;] fairness, moderation, gentleness ("sweet reasonableness," Matthew Arnold): Act.24:4; with πραΰτης, 2Co.10:1.† SYN.: πραΰτης (see Tr., Syn., § xliii) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
For we haue found this man a pestilent fellow, and a moouer of sedition among all the Iewes throughout the world, and a ringleader of the sect of the Nazarenes.

원어

εὑρόντες

한글 발음: 헤우론테스

heurontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-2AAP-NPM
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνδρα

한글 발음: 안드라

andra

원어 사전 정의 보기 G435 원어 검색에서 보기 G435
Lemma
ἀνήρ
Strong
G435
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
남자/남편
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '남자, 남편, 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀνήρ, ἀνδρός, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ, frequently אֱנוֹשׁ, also אָדָם, etc. ;] a man, Lat. vir. __1. As opposite to a woman, Act.8:12, 1Ti.2:12; as a husband, Mat.1:16, Jhn.4:16, Rom.7:2, Tit.1:6. __2. As opposite to a boy or infant, 1Co.13:11, Eph.4:13, Jas.3:2. __3. In appos. with a noun or adj., as ἀ. ἁμαρτωλός, Luk.5:8; ἀ. προφήτης, 24:19; frequently in terms of address, as ἀ. ἀδελφοί, Act.1:16; and esp. with gentilic names, as ἀ. Ἰουδαῖος, Act.22:3; ἀ. Ἐφέσιοι, 19:35. __4. In general, a man, a male person: = τις, Luk.8:41, Act.6:11. SYN.: ἄνθρωπος, which see (cf. MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦτον

한글 발음: 투톤

touton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λοιμὸν

한글 발음: 로이몬

loimon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3061 원어 검색에서 보기 G3061
Lemma
λοιμός
Strong
G3061
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
전염병/온역
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '전염병, 온역'; (비유) '괴악한 자'.

원문 정의 보기

λοιμός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX for לוּץ, עָרִיץ, בְּלִיַּעַל, etc. ;] pestilence: pl., Luk.21:11; metaphorically (as in cl.; LXX: Psa.1:1, Pro.21:24, 1Ma.15:21, al.), of persons, a pest: Act.24:5 (also as adj., ἄνδρες λοιμοί, 1Ma.10:61, al.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κινοῦντα

한글 발음: 키눈타

kinounta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2795 원어 검색에서 보기 G2795
Lemma
κινέω
Strong
G2795
형태소
V-PAP-ASM
품사
동사
움직이다/흔들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '움직이다, 흔들다, 일으키다'.

원문 정의 보기

κινέω, -ῶ [in LXX for נוּעַ hi., רָמַשׂ, etc. ;] __1. to set in motion, move: Mat.23:4; τ. κεφαλήν (Psa.22:8, al.), Mat.27:39, Mrk.15:29; pass. (cf. Gen.7:21), Act.17:28. __2. to remove: Rev.2:5 6:14. __3. to excite, stir up: Act.24:5; pass., Act.21:30 (cf. μετα-, συν-κινέω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στάσεις

한글 발음: 스타세이스

staseis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4714 원어 검색에서 보기 G4714
Lemma
στάσις
Strong
G4714
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
소동/분쟁
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소동, 폭동, 분쟁, 서 있음'.

원문 정의 보기

στάσις, -εως, ἡ (ἵστημι), [in LXX chiefly for עָמַד, its parts and derivatives, also for רִיב (Pr 1714), etc. (see Deiss., BS, 158 f.) ;] __1. a standing, place, status: σ. ἔχειν (Polyb., v, 5, 3; and cf. Lat. locum habere), Heb.9:8. __2. insurrection, sedition: Mrk.15:7, Luk.23:19, 25, Act.19:40 24:5. __3. In poets and late prose, strife, dissension (cf. MM, xxiii) Act.15:2 23:7, 10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πᾶσιν

한글 발음: 파신

pasin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-DPM
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίοις

한글 발음: 이우다이오이스

Ioudaiois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-DPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἰκουμένην

한글 발음: 오이쿠메넨

oikoumenēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3625 원어 검색에서 보기 G3625
Lemma
οἰκουμένη
Strong
G3625
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
천하/세상
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람 사는 온 세상, 천하'.

원문 정의 보기

οἰκουμένη, -ης, ἡ (fern. Pres. pass. ptcp. of οἰκέω; sc. γῆ) [in LXX chiefly for תֵּבֵל, אֶרֶץ ;] the inhabited earth; __(a) in cl., the countries occupied by Greeks, as disting. from barbarian lands (Hdt., Dem., al.); __(b) in later writers, the Roman world: Luk.2:1, Act.11:28 24:5; by meton., of its inhabitants : Act.17:6 19:27; __(with) in LXX (Psa.23:1 71:8, al.) and NT, also of the whole inhabited world: Mat.24:14, Luk.4:5 21:26, Rom.10:18, Heb.1:6, Rev.3:10 16:14; by meton. (ut supr.), Act.17:31, Rev.12:9; __(d) of the Messianic age, ἡ οἰ. ἡ μέλλουσα = ὁ αἰὼ ὁ μέλλων: Heb.2:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρωτοστάτην

한글 발음: 프로토스타텐

prōtostatēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4414 원어 검색에서 보기 G4414
Lemma
πρωτοστάτης
Strong
G4414
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
주동자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '우두머리, 주동자, 괴수'.

원문 정의 보기

πρωτοστάτης, -ου, ὁ (πρῶτος, ἵστημι) [in LXX: Job.15:24 AB * ;] prop., of soldiers, one who stands first, one in the front rank (Thuc., Xen.); hence, metaphorically, a leader: Act.24:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ναζωραίων

한글 발음: 나조라이온

Nazōraiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3480 원어 검색에서 보기 G3480
Lemma
Ναζωραῖος
Strong
G3480
형태소
N-GPM-LG
품사
명사
나사렛 사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '나사렛 사람 (예수의 별칭)'.

원문 정의 보기

Ναζωραῖος, -ου, ὁ (= -ρηνός, which see), a Nazarene: Mat.2:23 (LXX) Mat.26:71, Luk.18:37, Jhn.18:5, 7 19:19, Act.2:22 3:6 4:10 6:14 22:8 24:5 26:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αἱρέσεως·

한글 발음: 하이레세오스

haireseōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G139 원어 검색에서 보기 G139
Lemma
αἵρεσις
Strong
G139
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
분파/이단
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '파당, 분파, 이단'.

원문 정의 보기

αἵρεσις, -εως, ἡ (αἱρέω, -ομαι), [in LXX for נְדָבָה,] __1. capture. __2. choosing, choice (see MM, VGT, see word). __3. that which is chosen, hence, opinion; esp. a peculiar opinion, heresy: 1Co.11:19, Gal.5:20, 2Pe.2:1 R, txt. __4. In late writers (MM, VGT), of a set of persons professing particular principles or opinions, a school, sect, party, faction: Act.5:17 15:5 24:5,14 26:5 28:22, I Co, Ga, II Pe, l.with, R, mg. (Cremer, 614). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Who also hath gone about to profane the Temple: whom we tooke, and would haue iudged according to our lawe.

원어

ὃς

한글 발음: 호스

hos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-NSM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱερὸν

한글 발음: 히에론

hi'eron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2411 원어 검색에서 보기 G2411
Lemma
ἱερόν
Strong
G2411
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
성전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '성전' (성전 구역 전체).

원문 정의 보기

ἱερός, -ά, όν [in LXX: Eze.28:18 (מִקְדָּשׁ); τό ἱ, 1Ch.29:4 (בַּיִת), Eze.45:19 (עֲזָרָה); very frequently in I Est.1:1-58 -4 Mac ;] __1. in Hom., marvellous, mighty, divine. __2. (Also in Hom, and later cl.) consecrated to the deity, sacred: pl., ἱ. γράμματα, 2Ti.3:15. __3. As subst., __(a) (so in Hom.), τὰ ἱ., sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: 1Co.9:13; __(b) later, τὸ ἱ.,., a consecrated or sacred place, a temple: τ. Ἀρτέμιδος, Act.19:27; of the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part thereof (as distinct from ὁ ναός, which see, the Sanctuary proper): 1Co.9:13, and frequently in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mat.12:6, Mrk.13:3, Act.4:1, al. (on the use of ἱ. in Imperial Iuser., see Deiss., LAE, 380 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπείρασεν

한글 발음: 에페이라센

epeirasen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3985 원어 검색에서 보기 G3985
Lemma
πειράζω
Strong
G3985
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
시험하다/유혹하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '시험하다, 유혹하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πειράζω poët. and late prose form of πειράω, which see, [in LXX for נָסָה pi. ;] __1. to make proof of (Hom.). __2. to try, attempt (Luc., Polyb., with inf. (see M, Pr., 205; B1., § 69, 4), Act.9:26 16:7 24:6. __3. In LXX and NT, like Heb. נָסָה, with accusative of person(s), to test, try, prove; __(a) in a good sense : Jhn.6:6, 2Co.13:5, Heb.11:17, Rev.2:2; esp. of trials and af6ictions sent or permitted by God (Gen.22:1, Exo.20:20, Wis.3:5, al.), 1Co.10:13, Heb.2:18 4:15 11:17, 37, Rev.3:10; __(b) in a bad sense (Apoll. Rhod., 3, 10): of the attempts made to ensnare Jesus in his speech, Mat.16:1 19:3 22:18, 35 Mrk.8:11 10:2 12:15, Luk.11:16, Jhn.8:6; of temptation to sin, to tempt, Jas.1:13-14 (see Hort, in l), Gal.6:1, Rev.2:10; esp. of temptations of the devil, Mat.4:1, 3 Mrk.1:13, Luk.4:2, 1Co.7:5, 1Th.3:5; ὁ πειράζων, the tempter, Mat.4:3, 1Th.3:5; __(with) in bad sense also (Exo.17:2, 7, Num.14:22, al.), of distrustful testing, trying or challenging of God: Act.15:10, 1Co.10:9 (WH, mg., ἐξεπείρασαν), Heb.3:9; τ. πνεῦμα Κυρίου, Act.5:9 (of. ἐκ-πειράζω).† SYN.: δοκιμάζω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βεβηλῶσαι,

한글 발음: 베벨로사이

bebēlōsai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G953 원어 검색에서 보기 G953
Lemma
βεβηλόω
Strong
G953
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
더럽히다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '더럽히다, 모독하다, 속되게 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

βεβηλόω, -ῶ (βέβηλος), [in LXX chiefly for חלל ;] to profane: τ. σάββατον, Mat.12:5; τ. ἱερόν, Act.24:6 (Cremer, 141).† SYN.: κοινόω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὃν

한글 발음: 혼

hon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκρατήσαμεν

한글 발음: 에크라테사멘

ekratēsamen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2902 원어 검색에서 보기 G2902
Lemma
κρατέω
Strong
G2902
형태소
V-AAI-1P
품사
동사
붙잡다/주관하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '붙잡다, 잡다, 주관하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρατέω, -ῶ (κράτος), [in LXX chiefly for חָזַק hi., also for אָחַז, etc. ;] __1. to be strong, mighty, hence, to rule, be master, prevail (so chiefly in cl.; in LXX: Est.1:1, I Est.4:38, Wis.14:19, al.). __2. to get possession of, obtain, take hold of (Hdt., Thuc., al.): with genitive of thing(s) (M, Pr., 65), Act.27:13; τ. χειρός, Mat.9:25, Mrk.1:31 5:41 9:27, Luk.8:54; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:11; with accusative of person(s), Mat.14:3 18:28 21:46 22:6 26:4, 48 ff., Mrk.3:21 6:17 12:12 14:1, 44 ff, Act.3:11 24:6, Rev.20:2 (cf. 2Ki.6:6). __3. to hold, hold fast (Æsch., Polyb., al.): with accusative of thing(s), ἐν τ. δεξιᾷ, Rev.2:1. Metaphorical: with accusative of person(s), pass., Act.2:24; with accusative of thing(s), Rev.2:13, 25 3:11; τ. κεφαλήν (i.e. Christ), Col.2:19; τ. παράδοσιν (-εις), λόγον, διδαχήν, Mrk.7:3-4, 8 9:10, 2Th.2:15, Rev.2:14-15; with genitive of thing(s), Heb.4:14 6:18; of sins, to retain, Jhn.20:23; of re­straint, before ἵνα μή, Rev.7:1; pass., before τοῦ μή, Luk.24:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέτερον

한글 발음: 헤메테론

hēmeteron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
S-1PASN
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμον

한글 발음: 노몬

nomon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἠθελήσαμεν

한글 발음: 에텔레사멘

ēthelēsamen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2309 원어 검색에서 보기 G2309
Lemma
θέλω
Strong
G2309
형태소
V-AAI-1P
품사
동사
원하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원하다, 바라다, ~하려 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίνειν.

한글 발음: 크리네인

krinein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2919 원어 검색에서 보기 G2919
Lemma
κρίνω
Strong
G2919
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
판단하다/심판하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '판단하다, 심판하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב ,דּין, etc. ;] __1. to separate, select, choose (cl.; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). __2. to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. __3. to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf., Act.16:15; with accusative and pred., Act.13:46 26:8. __4. to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf., Act.21:25 27:1. __5. to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol., Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ., Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss., LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al.; pass., Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. __6. = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30" (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. __7. As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern ( 4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. __8. to bring to trial (cl.); mid., to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, συν-, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But the chiefe captaine Lysias came vpon vs, and with great violence tooke him away out of our hands:

원어

παρελθὼν

한글 발음: 파렐톤

parelthōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3928 원어 검색에서 보기 G3928
Lemma
παρέρχομαι
Strong
G3928
형태소
V-2AAP-NSM
품사
동사
지나가다/없어지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '지나가다, 사라지다, 어기다'.

원문 정의 보기

παρ-ἐρχομαι [in LXX chiefly for עָבַר ;] __1. to pass, pass by; __(a) of persons: absol., Luk.18:37; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.6:48; with accusative lot., Act.16:8; before διά, with genitive, Mat.8:28; __(b) of things : τ. ποτήριον, Mat.26:39 (ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ), Mat.26:42; of time, Mat.14:15, Mrk.14:35, Act.27:9, 1Pe.4:3. Metaphorical, __(a) to pass away, perish: Mat.5:18 24:34-35 Mrk.13:30-31, Luk.16:17 21:32-33, 2Co.5:17, Jas.1:10, 2Pe.3:10; __(b) to pass by, neglect, disregard: with accusative of thing(s), Luk.11:42 15:29. __2. to come to, arrive: Luk.12:37 17:7, Act.24:7, R, mg. (cf. ἀντι-παρέρχομαι).† SYN.: παραβαίνω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Λυσίας

한글 발음: 뤼시아스

Lusias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3079 원어 검색에서 보기 G3079
Lemma
Λυσίας
Strong
G3079
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
루시아
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '루시아'.

원문 정의 보기

Λυσίας, -ου, ὁ Lysias (Claudius L., Act.23:26), Act.24:7, 22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χιλίαρχος

한글 발음: 킬리아르코스

chiliarchos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5506 원어 검색에서 보기 G5506
Lemma
χιλίαρχος
Strong
G5506
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
천부장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천부장, 군대 지휘관'.

원문 정의 보기

χιλίαρχος (in Hdt., al., -ης), -ου, ὁ (χίλιοι, ἄρχω) [in LXX chiefly for אַלּוּף שַׂר ;] a chiliarch, the commander of a thousand, esp. a Roman military tribune, the commander of a cohort: Jhn.18:12, Act.21:31-33, 37 22:24-29 23:10, 15 23:17-19, 22 24:7, 22 25:23; more generally, of officers of similar rank, Mrk.6:21, Rev.6:15 19:18 (see, DB, i, 352b; DCG, i, 271a, 307a).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολλῆς

한글 발음: 폴레스

pollēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-GSF
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

βίας

한글 발음: 비아스

bias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G970 원어 검색에서 보기 G970
Lemma
βία
Strong
G970
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
힘/폭력
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '힘, 폭력, 강제'.

원문 정의 보기

βία, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX for פֶּרֶךְ, etc. ;] strength, force, violence: Act.5:26 21:35 24:7 27:41.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χειρῶν

한글 발음: 케이론

cheirōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5495 원어 검색에서 보기 G5495
Lemma
χείρ
Strong
G5495
형태소
N-GPF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '손'.

원문 정의 보기

χείρ, genitive, χειρος (accusative, χεῖραν, 1Pe.5:6 T), ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for יָד ;] the hand: Mat.3:12, Mrk.3:1, Luk.6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Luk.22:21; pl., Act.17:25 20:34, 1Jn.1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Act.7:41, Rev.9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., 1Co.16:21, Col.4:18, 2Th.3:17; prepositional phrases, esp. those without art., similar to Heb. constructions (Bl., §32, 4; 40, 9; 46, 9), ἐν χ.; with genitive (Lft., in l.), Gal.3:19; σὺν χ. ἀγγέλου, Act.7:35; διὰ (τῶν) χειρῶν (διὰ χειρός), Mrk.6:2, Act.5:12 7:25, al.; ἐπὶ χειρῶν, Mat.4:6, Luk.4:11; ellipse of χ. (ἡ δεξία, ἀριστερα; Bl., §44, 1), Mat.6:3, al. By meton., for the power or activity of an individual, Mat.17:22, Mrk.9:31, Luk.9:31, Jhn.10:39, Act.12:11, al.; metaphorically, of the activity or power of God: Luk.1:66 23:46, Jhn.10:29, Act.11:21 13:11, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμῶν

한글 발음: 헤몬

hēmōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GP
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπήγαγε,

한글 발음: 아페가게

apēgage

원어 사전 정의 보기 G520 원어 검색에서 보기 G520
Lemma
ἀπάγω
Strong
G520
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
끌고 가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '끌고 가다, 데려가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπ-άγω [in LXX for נָהַג, הָלַךְ hi., etc. ;] to lead away: Luk.13:15, Act.23:17 24:7 (R, mg.), 1Co.12:2; esp. of leading to trial (so as law term in Attic), prison and death (MM, VGT, see word): Mat.26:57 27:2, 31, Mrk.14:44, 53 15:16, Luk.21:12 22:66 23:26, Act.12:19; of the direction of a way: Mat.7:13-14 (cf. συν-απ-άγω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Commanding his accusers to come vnto thee, by examining of whom thy selfe mayest take knowledge of all these things, whereof we accuse him.

원어

κελεύσας

한글 발음: 켈레우사스

keleusas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2753 원어 검색에서 보기 G2753
Lemma
κελεύω
Strong
G2753
형태소
V-AAP-NSM
품사
동사
명령하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '명령하다, 분부하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κελεύω [in LXX: I Est.9:53, Tob.8:18, al., and frequently in 1-4Mac ;] to urge on, bid by word of mouth, order, command (mostly of one in authority): with accusative and inf. aor., Mat.14:19, 28 18:25 27:64, Luk.18:40, Act.4:15 5:34 8:38 22:30 23:10 25:6, 17; with ellipse of accusative, Mat.8:18 14:9 27:58, Act.12:19 21:33; with accusative and inf. Pres., Act.21:34 22:24 23:3, 35 25:21 27:43; with ellipse of accusative, Act.16:22; ptcp. aor., Act.25:23.† SYN.: see: ἐντέλλω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

한글 발음: 투스

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατηγόρους

한글 발음: 카테고루스

katēgorous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2725 원어 검색에서 보기 G2725
Lemma
κατήγορος
Strong
G2725
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
고발자/송사하는 자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '고발자, 송사하는 자'.

원문 정의 보기

κατήγορος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX: Pro.18:17 (רִיב), 2Ma.4:5 * ;] an accuser: Act.23:30, 35 24:8 (WH, R, txt. om.) Act.25:16, 18.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔρχεσθαι

한글 발음: 에르케스타이

erchesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNN
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

한글 발음: 에피

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σέ·

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρ᾽

한글 발음: 파르

par᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3844 원어 검색에서 보기 G3844
Lemma
παρά
Strong
G3844
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~곁에/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~로부터', 여격 '~곁에', 대격 '~옆을 따라'.

원문 정의 보기

παρά, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative, with radical sense, beside. __I. C. genitive of person(s), from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל ,מִיַד ,מִלִּפְנֵי ;] after verbs of motion, Mrk.14:43, Luk.8:49, Jhn.15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mrk.8:11 12:2, Jhn.4:9, 52 10:18, Php.4:18, 2Ti.1:18, Jas.1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mat.21:42, Mrk.12:11, Luk.1:37; absol., οἱ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Mrk.3:21 (cf. M, Pr., 106f.; Field, Notes, 25f.; Swete, in l.); τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῆς (αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν, one's means, wealth, Mrk.5:26, Luk.10:7, Php.4:18. __II. C. dative of person(s) (exc. Jhn.19:25, π. τ. σταυρῷ), by the side of, beside, by, with, [in LXX for בְּעֵינֵי ,בְּיַד ,אֵצֶל ;] Luk.11:37 19:7, Jhn.1:40 4:40, Act.28:14, al.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1Co.16:2; with dative pl., among, Mat.22:25, Col.4:16, al.; metaphorically, Mat.19:26, Mrk.10:27, Luk.1:30, Rom.2:13, Jas.1:27, al. __III. C. accusative, of motion by or towards, [in LXX for בְּעֵבֶר ,עַל יַד ,אֵצֶל ;] __1. of place, by the side of, beside, by, along: Act.10:32, Heb.11:12; after verbs of motion, Mat.4:18, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, Act.4:35, al.; after verbs of rest, Mat.13:1, Mrk.5:21, Luk.8:35, al. __2. beside, beyond, metaphorically; __(a) beyond, against, contrary to: Act.18:13, Rom.1:26 4:18 11:24, al.; except, 2Co.11:24; __(b) beyond, above, in comparison with: Luk.3:13, Rom.12:3 14:5, Heb.1:4, 9 3:3, al.; __(with) on account of: 1Co.12:15, 16. __IV. In composition: beside, to (παραλαμβάνω, παράγω), at hand (πάρειμι), from (παραρρέω), amiss (παρακούω), past (παρέρχομαι), compared with (παρομοιάζω), above measure (παροργίζω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗ

한글 발음: 후

hou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GSM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δυνήσῃ

한글 발음: 뒤네세

dunēsē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-FDI-2S
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸς

한글 발음: 아우토스

autos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνακρίνας

한글 발음: 아나크리나스

anakrinas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G350 원어 검색에서 보기 G350
Lemma
ἀνακρίνω
Strong
G350
형태소
V-AAP-NSM
품사
동사
살피다/심문하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '자세히 살피다, 심문하다, 분별하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀνα-κρίνω [in LXX: 1Ki.20:12 (חָקַר), Dan LXX Su 1:13, LXX, TH Su 1:48, 51 * ;] to examine, investigate, question (Lft., Notes, 181 f.): Act.17:11, 1Co.2:14-15 4:3-4 9:3 10:25 10:27 14:24; in forensic sense (MM, VGT, see word; esp. of examination by torture; see Field, Notes, 120 f.), Luk.23:14, Act.4:9 12:19 24:8 28:18.† SYN.: see: ἐξετάζω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πάντων

한글 발음: 판톤

pantōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-GPN
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτων

한글 발음: 투톤

toutōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-GPN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπιγνῶναι

한글 발음: 에피그노나이

epignōnai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1921 원어 검색에서 보기 G1921
Lemma
ἐπιγινώσκω
Strong
G1921
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
알다/깨닫다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '충분히 알다, 인식하다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπι-γινώσκω [in LXX chiefly for נָכַר: hi., also for יָדַע, etc. ;] "directive" of γινώσκω (AR, Eph., 249), as in cl.; __1. to observe, perceive, discern, recognize; __(a) absol.: Act.25:10, 1Co.13:12; before ὅτι, Luk.1:22; τ. πνεύματι, before ὅτι, Mrk.2:8; __(b) with accusative of thing(s): Luk.1:4 5:22, Act.12:14 27:39, Rom.1:32, 2Co.1:13, Col.1:6, 1Ti.4:3; ἐν ἐαυτῷ, Mrk.5:30; before ὅτι, 1Co.14:37; __(with) with accusative of person(s): Mat.11:27 14:36 17:12, Mrk.6:33 (T, αὐτούς, but LTr., WH, R, omit the prop., and LTr., WH, txt., read ἔγνωσαν), Mrk.6:54 Luk.24:16, 31, 1Co.16:18, 2Co.1:14; before ἀπό, with genitive of thing(s), Mat.7:16, 20; before ὅτι, Act.3:10 4:13, 2Co.13:5; pass., 1Co.13:12; opposite to ἀγνοούμενοι, 2Co.6:9. __2. to discover, ascertain, determine: Act.9:30; before ὅτι, Luk.7:37 23:7, Act.19:34 22:29 24:11 28:1; with accusative of thing(s), before quæst., Act.23:28; δι᾽ ἣν αἰτίαν, Act.22:24; παρά, with genitive of person(s), before περ, with genitive of thing(s), Act.24:8; τ. ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2Pe.2:21 (cf. Lft., Col., 136; Cremer, 159; M, Pr., 113; AR, Eph., 248 ff.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὧν

한글 발음: 혼

hōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GPN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμεῖς

한글 발음: 헤메이스

hēmeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1NP
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατηγοροῦμεν

한글 발음: 카테고루멘

katēgoroumen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2723 원어 검색에서 보기 G2723
Lemma
κατηγορέω
Strong
G2723
형태소
V-PAI-1P
품사
동사
고발하다/고소하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고발하다, 고소하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατηγορέω, -ῶ (κατά, ἀγορεύω), [in LXX: Dan LXX 6:5, (9), 1Ma.7:6 1Mac 7:25, 2Ma.4:47 2Mac 10:13 2Mac 10:21, 4Ma.9:14 * ;] to make accusation, accuse, __(a) in general: absol., Rom.2:15; with genitive of person(s) (cl., WM, 254), Jhn.5:45; irreg. with accusative of person(s), Rev.12:10; __(b) before a judge: absol., Act.24:2, 19; with genitive of person(s), Mat.12:10, Mrk.3:2, Luk.6:7 11:54 (WH, txt., R, om.), Luk.23:2, 10, Jhn.8:6 Act.25:5 28:19; id. with accusative of thing(s) (cl., but see WM, l.with), Mrk.15:3-4; with genitive of thing(s) (Dem.), Act.24:8 25:11; before περί, with genitive of thing(s) (Thuc., viii, 85), Act.24:13; with accusative of thing(s), before κατά with genitive of person(s) (WM, § 28, 1), Luk.23:14. Pass. (B1., § 54, 3), before ὑπό with genitive, Mat.27:12, Act.22:30; ὁ κατηγορούμενος, Act.25:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ.

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And the Iewes also assented, saying that these things were so.

원어

συνεπέθεντο

한글 발음: 쉬네페텐토

sunepethento

원어 사전 정의 보기 G9315 원어 검색에서 보기 G9315
Lemma
συνεπιτίθημι
Strong
G9315
형태소
V-2AMI-3P
품사
동사
함께 공격하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '함께 공격하다, 합세하여 덤비다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to help in putting on , (Plutarch) 2. Mid. to join in attacking , τινι (Thucydides); ξ. τῷ ἔργῳ ̀ 6 6̀ το fall to the work together , (Thucydides) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαῖοι

한글 발음: 이우다이오이

Ioudaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-NPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φάσκοντες

한글 발음: 파스콘테스

phaskontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5335 원어 검색에서 보기 G5335
Lemma
φάσκω
Strong
G5335
형태소
V-PAP-NPM
품사
동사
자칭하다/주장하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 자칭하다, 주장하다'.

원문 정의 보기

φάσκω [in LXX: Gen.26:20 (אָמַר), Dan LXX Bel 1:8, 2Ma.14:27 2Mac 14:32, 3Ma.3:7 * ;] to affirm, assert: with accusative and inf., Act.24:9 25:19; with inf. and nom., Rom.1:22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὕτως

한글 발음: 후토스

houtōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3779 원어 검색에서 보기 G3779
Lemma
οὕτως
Strong
G3779
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이와 같이
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이와 같이, 그렇게'.

원문 정의 보기

οὕτως, rarely (Bl., §5, 4; WH, App., 146f.) οὕτω, adv. (οὗτος), [in LXX chiefly for כֵּן ;] in this way, so, thus; __1. referring to what precedes: Mat.5:16 6:30, Mrk.10:43 14:59, Luk.1:25 2:48 15:7, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:15, 1Co.8:12, al.; οὕτως καί, Mat.17:12, Mrk.13:29, al.; pleonastically, resuming a ptcp. (cl.; see Bl., §74, 6), Act.20:11 27:17. __2. Referring to what follows: Mat.1:18 6:9, Luk.19:31, Jhn.21:1, 1Pe.2:15; bef. quotations from OT, Mat.2:5, Act.7:6, 1Co.15:45, Heb.4:4. __3. C. adj. (marking intensity): Heb.12:21, Rev.16:18; similarly with adv., Gal.1:6 (cl.). __4. As a predicate (Bl., §76, 1): Mat.1:18 9:33, Mrk.2:1, 2 4:26, Rom.4:18 9:20, I Pe 2:15; οὕ ἔχειν (Lat. sic or ita se habere), Act.7:1, al.; ἐκαθέζετο (as he was, without delay or preparation), Jhn.4:6. __5. In comparison, with correlative adv.: καθάπερ . . . οὕ., Rom.12:4, 5 al.; καθὼς . . . οὕ., Luk.11:30, al.; οὕ. . . . καθώς, Luk.24:24, al.; ὡς . . . οὕ., Rom.5:15, al.; οὕ . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, al; ὥσπερ . . . οὕ., Mat.12:40, al.; οὕ. . . . οὕ., 1Co.7:7. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχειν.¶

한글 발음: 에케인

echein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Then Paul, after that the gouernour had beckened vnto him to speake, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many yeeres a Iudge vnto this nation, I do the more cheerefully answere for my selfe:

원어

Ἀπεκρίθη

한글 발음: 아페크리테

Apekrithē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Παῦλος,

한글 발음: 파울로스

Paulos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3972 원어 검색에서 보기 G3972
Lemma
Παῦλος
Strong
G3972
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
바울
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '바울'.

원문 정의 보기

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus), __1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7. __2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νεύσαντος

한글 발음: 네우산토스

neusantos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3506 원어 검색에서 보기 G3506
Lemma
νεύω
Strong
G3506
형태소
V-AAP-GSM
품사
동사
고갯짓하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고갯짓하다, 눈짓하다'.

원문 정의 보기

νεύω [in LXX: Pro.4:5 21:1 * ;] to nod or beckon, as a sign : with dative of person(s) and inf., Jhn.13:24, Act.24:10 (cf. δια-, ἐκ-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-νεύω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡγεμόνος

한글 발음: 헤게모노스

hēgemonos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2232 원어 검색에서 보기 G2232
Lemma
ἡγεμών
Strong
G2232
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
총독/통치자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '총독, 통치자, 다스리는 자'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡγεμών, -όνος, ὁ (ἡγέομαι) [in LXX for אַלּוּף, שַׂר, etc. ;] __1. a leader, guide. __2. a commander. __3. a governor of a province (pro­consul, proprietor, legate, or procurator; but cf. ἀνθύπατος): Mat.10:18, Mrk.13:9, Luk.21:12, 1Pe.2:14; of the Procurator of Judæa, Mat.27:2, 11 27:14-15, 21 27:27 28:14, Luk.20:20, Act.23:24, 26 23:33 24:1, 10 26:30. __4. For Heb. אַלְפֵי (LXX, χίλιαι) misread אַלֻּפֵי, leaders: Mat.2:6 (OT).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγειν·

한글 발음: 레게인

legein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολλῶν

한글 발음: 폴론

pollōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-GPN
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐτῶν

한글 발음: 에톤

etōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2094 원어 검색에서 보기 G2094
Lemma
ἔτος
Strong
G2094
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
해/년
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '해, 년'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔτος, -ους, τό [in LXX for שָׁנֶה ;] a year: Luk.3:1, Heb.1:12, Rev.20:3, al.; ἔτη ἔχειν, Jhn.5:5 8:57; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, ἐτῶν, Mrk.5:42, Luk.2:42, Act.4:22, 1Ti.5:9; dative pl. of space of time, Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; accusative, in ans. to how long? Mat.9:20, Mrk.5:25, Luk.2:36, Act.7:6, Heb.3:9, al.; preceded by a prep.: dim, Luk.8:43, Rom.15:23; διά, with genitive (see: διά), Act.24:17, Gal.2:1; ἐκ, Act.24:10; εἰς, Luk.12:19; ἐπί, with accusative, Act.19:10; μετά, with accusative, Gal.1:18 3:17; πρό, with genitive, 2Co.12:2; κατ᾽ ἔτος, yearly, Luk.2:41 SYN.: ἐνιαυτός, which see; cf. LS, see word ἐνιαυτός (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄντα

한글 발음: 온타

onta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAP-ASM
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σε

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κριτὴν

한글 발음: 크리텐

kritēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2923 원어 검색에서 보기 G2923
Lemma
κριτής
Strong
G2923
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
재판관/심판자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '재판관, 심판자'.

원문 정의 보기

κριτής, -οῦ, ὁ (κρίνω), [in LXX chiefly for שָׁפַט ;] a judge: Mat.5:25, Luk.12:14, 58 18:2; τ. ἀδικίας, Luk.18:6; with gem of thing(s) (obj.), Act.18:15, Jas.4:11; (qual.), διαλογισμῶν πονηρῶν, Jas.2:4; of a Roman procurator, Act.24:10; of God, Heb.12:23, Jas.4:12; Christ, Act.10:42, 2Ti.4:8, Jas.5:9; of those whose conduct is made a standard for judging, Mat.12:27, Luk.11:19; in the OT sense (Jdg.2:16, Rut.1:1, al), of a ruler in Israel, Act.13:20.† SYN.: δικάστης, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔθνει

한글 발음: 에트네이

ethnei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1484 원어 검색에서 보기 G1484
Lemma
ἔθνος
Strong
G1484
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
이방인/민족
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '민족, 백성'; 복수로 '이방인'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔθνος, -ους, τό, [in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;] __1. a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.). __2. a nation, people: Mat.21:43 24:7, Mrk.13:8, Luk.22:25, Act.10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Luk.7:5 23:2, Jhn.11:48, 50-53 18:35, Act.10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19. __3. In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mat.4:15 6:32, Act.26:17, Rom.3:29 11:11 15:10, Gal.2:8, al.; of Gentile Christians, Rom.11:13 15:27 16:4, Gal.2:12, 14, Eph.3:1. SYN.: λαός (see DCG, ii, 229; Cremer, 226). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτῳ

한글 발음: 투토

toutō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-DSN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπιστάμενος

한글 발음: 에피스타메노스

epistamenos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1987 원어 검색에서 보기 G1987
Lemma
ἐπίσταμαι
Strong
G1987
형태소
V-PNP-NSM
품사
동사
알다/이해하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 이해하다, 정통하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπίσταμαι (prob. an old mid, of ἐφίστημι, which see), [in LXX chiefly for יָדַע ;] to know, know of, understand: with accusative of person(s), Act.19:15; with ptcp., Act.24:10; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.14:68, Act.18:25, 1Ti.6:4, Jas.4:14, Ju 10; before περί, Act.26:26; ὅτι, Act.15:7 19:25 22:19; ὡς, Act.10:28; πῶς, Act.20:18; ποῦ, Heb.11:8.† SYN: γινώσκω (which see), οἶδα (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὐθύμως

한글 발음: 에우튀모스

euthumōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2115 원어 검색에서 보기 G2115
Lemma
εὔθυμος
Strong
G2115
형태소
A-APN
품사
형용사
기운을 북돋우는
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '기운찬, 힘을 내는'.

원문 정의 보기

εὔ-θυμος, -ον [in LXX: 2Ma.11:26 * ;] __1. kind (Hom.). __2. of good cheer (Æsch., al.): Act.27:36.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

한글 발음: 타

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμαυτοῦ

한글 발음: 에마우투

emautou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
F-1GSM
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπολογοῦμαι·

한글 발음: 아폴로구마이

apologoumai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G626 원어 검색에서 보기 G626
Lemma
ἀπολογέομαι
Strong
G626
형태소
V-PNI-1S
품사
동사
변호하다/변명하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '자신을 변호하다, 변명하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπολογέομαι, -οῦμαι (ἀπό, λόγος), [in LXX: Jer.12:1 (רִיב) Jer.31:6, 2Ma.13:26 * ;] __1. to defend: with accusative, Rom.2:15. __2. to defend one's self: absol., Luk.21:14, Act.26:1; before ὅτι, Act.25:8; τί, to adduce something in one's defence, Luk.12:11, Act.26:24 (ταῦτα) Act.24:10 (τὰ περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ); περί, with genitive of thing(s), and ἐπί, with genitive of person(s), Act.26:2; with dative of person(s), Act.19:33, 2Co.12:19.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Because that thou mayest vnderstand, that there are yet but twelue dayes, since I went vp to Hierusalem for to worship.

원어

δυναμένου

한글 발음: 뒤나메누

dunamenou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNP-GSM
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σου

한글 발음: 수

sou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπιγνῶναι

한글 발음: 에피그노나이

epignōnai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1921 원어 검색에서 보기 G1921
Lemma
ἐπιγινώσκω
Strong
G1921
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
알다/깨닫다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '충분히 알다, 인식하다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπι-γινώσκω [in LXX chiefly for נָכַר: hi., also for יָדַע, etc. ;] "directive" of γινώσκω (AR, Eph., 249), as in cl.; __1. to observe, perceive, discern, recognize; __(a) absol.: Act.25:10, 1Co.13:12; before ὅτι, Luk.1:22; τ. πνεύματι, before ὅτι, Mrk.2:8; __(b) with accusative of thing(s): Luk.1:4 5:22, Act.12:14 27:39, Rom.1:32, 2Co.1:13, Col.1:6, 1Ti.4:3; ἐν ἐαυτῷ, Mrk.5:30; before ὅτι, 1Co.14:37; __(with) with accusative of person(s): Mat.11:27 14:36 17:12, Mrk.6:33 (T, αὐτούς, but LTr., WH, R, omit the prop., and LTr., WH, txt., read ἔγνωσαν), Mrk.6:54 Luk.24:16, 31, 1Co.16:18, 2Co.1:14; before ἀπό, with genitive of thing(s), Mat.7:16, 20; before ὅτι, Act.3:10 4:13, 2Co.13:5; pass., 1Co.13:12; opposite to ἀγνοούμενοι, 2Co.6:9. __2. to discover, ascertain, determine: Act.9:30; before ὅτι, Luk.7:37 23:7, Act.19:34 22:29 24:11 28:1; with accusative of thing(s), before quæst., Act.23:28; δι᾽ ἣν αἰτίαν, Act.22:24; παρά, with genitive of person(s), before περ, with genitive of thing(s), Act.24:8; τ. ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης, 2Pe.2:21 (cf. Lft., Col., 136; Cremer, 159; M, Pr., 113; AR, Eph., 248 ff.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πλείους

한글 발음: 플레이우스

pleious

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-NPF-C
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰσίν

한글 발음: 에이신

eisin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μοι

한글 발음: 모이

moi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1DS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέραι

한글 발음: 헤메라이

hēmerai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-NPF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δώδεκα

한글 발음: 도데카

dōdeka

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1427 원어 검색에서 보기 G1427
Lemma
δώδεκα
Strong
G1427
형태소
A-NUI
품사
형용사
열둘
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '열둘' (12제자).

원문 정의 보기

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl. numeral, twelve: Mat.9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mat.10:5, Mrk.4:10, al.; in Act.19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀφ᾽

한글 발음: 아프

aph᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἧς

한글 발음: 헤스

hēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GSF
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνέβην

한글 발음: 아네벤

anebēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAI-1S
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προσκυνήσων

한글 발음: 프로스퀴네손

proskunēsōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4352 원어 검색에서 보기 G4352
Lemma
προσκυνέω
Strong
G4352
형태소
V-FAP-NSM
품사
동사
경배하다/절하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '경배하다, 절하다, 예배하다'.

원문 정의 보기

προσ-κυνέω, -ῶ (κυνέω, to kiss), [in LXX chiefly for שָׁחָה hith. ;] to make obeisance, do reverence to, worship; __(a) prop. (as in cl., of the gods: Hdt., Æsch., Plat., al.), of God, Christ and supra-mundane beings: absol., Jhn.4:20 12:20, Act.8:27 24:11, Heb.11:21 (Westc., in l), Rev.11:1; πίπτειν καὶ π., Rev.5:14; with dative (of the significance of this constr. as com­pared with the usual cl., with accusative, see Abbott, JG, 78 f.; JV, 133 ff.), Jhn.4:21, 23, Act.7:43, 1Co.14:25, Heb.1:6, Rev.4:10 7:11 11:16 13:4, 15 14:7 16:2 19:4, 10 19:20 22:8-9; with accusative (see supr.), Mat.4:10, Luk.4:8 24:52 (WH, R, mg., om.), Jhn.4:22, 24, Rev.9:20 13:4, 8 13:12 14:9, 11 20:4; Seq. ἐπώπιον, Luk.4:7, Rev.15:4; __(b) as in cl., of homage to human superiors (cf. MM, xxi): absol., Mat.20:20, Act.10:25; with dative (see supr.), Mat.2:2, 8 8:2 9:18 14:33 15:25 18:26 28:9, Mrk.15:19, Jhn.9:38; πεσὼν., Mat.2:11 4:9; ἐνώπιον τ. ποδῶν, Rev.3:9; with accusative, Mrk.5:6 (dative T).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰερουσαλήμ·

한글 발음: 이에루살렘

Ierousalēm

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2419 원어 검색에서 보기 G2419
Lemma
Ἱερουσαλήμ
Strong
G2419
형태소
N-ASF-L
품사
명사
예루살렘
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예루살렘' (히브리어식 표기).

원문 정의 보기

Ἱερουσαλήμ, see: Ἱεροσόλυμα - (WH, Ἰερ-, see Intr., § 408), -ων, τά (on πᾶσα Ἱ., Mat.2:3, see WM, 794; M, Pr., 48, 244; Thayer, see word), and Ἱερουσαλήμ (WH, Ἰερ-), ἡ., indecl., as always in LXX exc. some parts of Apocr.. (Heb. יְרוּשָׁלִַם), the former always in FlJ, Mk, Jo EV. and Mt (except. Mat.27:37), and most frequently in Lk, the latter always in He, Re, and by St. Paul (except. Gal.1:17-18 2:1), Jerusalem: Mat.2:1, Mrk.3:8, Jhn.1:19, al.; its inhabitants, Mat.2:3 3:5 23:37, Luk.13:34, Symbolically, ἡ- ἄνω Ἱ., Gal.4:26, contrasted with ἡ νῦν Ἱ., Gal.4:25; Ἱ. ἐπουράνιος, Heb.12:22; ἡ καινὴ Ἱ., Rev.3:12 21:2, 10 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And they neither found me in the Temple disputing with any man, neither raising vp the people, neither in the Synagogues, nor in the citie:

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

한글 발음: 우테

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱερῷ

한글 발음: 히에로

hi'erō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2411 원어 검색에서 보기 G2411
Lemma
ἱερόν
Strong
G2411
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
성전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '성전' (성전 구역 전체).

원문 정의 보기

ἱερός, -ά, όν [in LXX: Eze.28:18 (מִקְדָּשׁ); τό ἱ, 1Ch.29:4 (בַּיִת), Eze.45:19 (עֲזָרָה); very frequently in I Est.1:1-58 -4 Mac ;] __1. in Hom., marvellous, mighty, divine. __2. (Also in Hom, and later cl.) consecrated to the deity, sacred: pl., ἱ. γράμματα, 2Ti.3:15. __3. As subst., __(a) (so in Hom.), τὰ ἱ., sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: 1Co.9:13; __(b) later, τὸ ἱ.,., a consecrated or sacred place, a temple: τ. Ἀρτέμιδος, Act.19:27; of the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part thereof (as distinct from ὁ ναός, which see, the Sanctuary proper): 1Co.9:13, and frequently in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mat.12:6, Mrk.13:3, Act.4:1, al. (on the use of ἱ. in Imperial Iuser., see Deiss., LAE, 380 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὗρόν

한글 발음: 헤우론

heuron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρός

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τινα

한글 발음: 티나

tina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-ASM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διαλεγόμενον

한글 발음: 디알레고메논

dialegomenon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1256 원어 검색에서 보기 G1256
Lemma
διαλέγω
Strong
G1256
형태소
V-PNP-ASM
품사
동사
강론하다/변론하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '강론하다, 토론하다, 변론하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δια-λέγομαι (mid. of διαλέγω, to pick out, distinguish, as depon.), [in LXX: Exo.6:27, Isa.63:1 (דּבר pi.), Jdg.8:1 (ריב), 1Es.8:46, Est.5:2, Sir.14:20, 2Ma.11:20 * ;] to converse with, discourse (see Cl. Rev., i, 45), discuss, argue: Act.18:4 19:8,9 20:9; with dative of person(s), Act.17:17 18:19 20:7, Heb.12:5; before πρός, Mrk.9:34, Act.17:17 24:12; περί Act.24:25, Ju 9; ἀπὸ τ. γραφῶν, Act.17:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπίστασιν

한글 발음: 에피스타신

epistasin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G20447 원어 검색에서 보기 G20447
Lemma
ἐπίστασις
Strong
G20447
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
멈춤/몰림
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '멈춤, 정지'. (또는 몰려듦, 압박)

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί-στασις, -εως, ἡ (ἐφίστημι), [in LXX: 2Ma.6:3 * ;] __1. a stopping, halting (as of soldiers): ὄχλου, collecting a crowd (see Rack-ham, Acts, l.with): Act.24:12 (WH, Rec. ἐπισύστασις). __2. superintendence, attention (but see Thayer, see word; Field, Notes, 185 f.): 2Co.11:28 (WH, Rec. ut supr.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιοῦντα

한글 발음: 포이운타

poiounta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAP-ASM
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλου

한글 발음: 오클루

ochlou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

한글 발음: 우테

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῖς

한글 발음: 타이스

tais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

συναγωγαῖς

한글 발음: 쉬나고가이스

sunagōgais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4864 원어 검색에서 보기 G4864
Lemma
συναγωγή
Strong
G4864
형태소
N-DPF
품사
명사
회당
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '회당'.

원문 정의 보기

συν-αγωγή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for עֵדָה, also for קָהָל, etc. ;] prop., a bringing together; __1. of things, __(a) a gathering in of harvest; __(b) a collection of money. __2. Of persons, __(a) a collecting, assembling (Polyb.); __(b) an assembly (MM, xxiv; Deiss., LAE, 101 ff.): Rev.2:9 3:9; esp. of a Jewish religious assembly, a synagogue: Luk.12:11, Act.9:2, al.; of a Christian assembly, Jas.2:2. By meton., of the building in which the assembly is held, a synagogue: Mat.10:17, Mrk.1:21, al. (cf. Cremer, see word ἐκκλησία) SYN.: ἐκκλησία (which see) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔτε

한글 발음: 우테

oute

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3777 원어 검색에서 보기 G3777
Lemma
οὔτε
Strong
G3777
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다' (οὔτε...οὔτε '~도 ~도 아니다').

원문 정의 보기

οὔτε negative particle, related to μήτε as οὐ to μή, and not, neither, nor: οὐδεὶς . . . οὔτε, Rev.5:4; οὐδὲ . . . οὔτε, Gal.1:12; οὔτε . . . καί, Jhn.4:11; after a question with μή interrog., Jas.3:12; οὔτε . . . οὔτε, neither . . . nor, Mat.6:20, Mrk.12:25, Jhn.4:21, Act.15:10, Rom.8:38-39, Gal.5:6, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόλιν·

한글 발음: 폴린

polin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4172 원어 검색에서 보기 G4172
Lemma
πόλις
Strong
G4172
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
성/도시
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '도시, 성읍'.

원문 정의 보기

πόλις, -εως, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for עִיר ;] a city: Mat.2:23, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:29, Jhn.4:8, al. mult.; opposite to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mat.9:35 10:11, Mrk.6:56, Luk.8:1 13:22; with nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Act.11:5 16:14; with id. in genitive appos. (BL, §35, 5), Act.8:5, 2Pe.2:6; genitive, of the region, Luk.1:26 4:31, Jhn.4:5; of the inhabitants, Mat.10:5, 23 Luk.23:51, Act.19:35, 2Co.11:32; with genitive of person(s), of one's residence or native place, Mat.22:7, Luk.2:4, 11 4:29 10:11, Jhn.1:45, Act.16:20, Rev.16:9; of Jerusalem: ἡ ἁγία π., Mat.4:5 27:53, Rev.11:2; ἡ ἠγαπημένη, Rev.20:19; π. τοῦ μεγάλου, Mt 5 ̈35 (cf. Ps 47 (48):2); of the heavenly city in the Apocalyptic visions, Rev.3:12 21:2, 10 14ff. 22:14, 19. By meton., of the inhabitants of a city: Mat.8:34 12:25 21:10, Mrk.1:33, Act.14:21 21:30. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Neither can they proue the things whereof they now accuse me.

원어

οὐδὲ

한글 발음: 우데

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παραστῆσαι

한글 발음: 파라스테사이

parastēsai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3936 원어 검색에서 보기 G3936
Lemma
παρίστημι
Strong
G3936
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
곁에 두다/드리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '곁에 세우다, 드리다, 옆에 서다'.

원문 정의 보기

παρ-ίστημι [in LXX for עָמַד, etc. ;] __I. Transitive verb. in present tense., imperfect., future tense., 1 aorist.; __1. to place beside, present, provide: with accusative, Act.9:41 23:24, 2Co.4:14, Col.1:28; with accusative and dative, Mat.26:53, Luk.2:22, Act.1:3 23:33, 1Co.8:8; before accusative pred., Rom.6:13, 16 (late pres., παριστάνετε), Rom.6:19 12:1, 2Co.11:2, Eph.5:27, Col.1:22, 2Ti.2:15. __2. to present to the mind (cl.) : by argument, to prove (Xen., FlJ, al.), with accusative, Act.24:13. __II. Intransitive. in perfect., pluperfect., 2 aorist.; __1. to stand by or beside one : with dative of person(s), Act.1:10 9:39 23:2 27:23; ptcp., Mrk.14:47, 69-70 15:35, 39 Jhn.18:22 19:26. __2. to appear: with nom. pred., before ἐνώπιον, Act.4:10; with dative of person(s), Act.27:24; so fut. mid. (of. LS, see word, B, ii, 2), Rom.14:10. __3. to be at hand, be present, have come: Act.4:26 (LXX); of servants in attendance, ἐνώπιον τ. θεοῦ, Luk.1:19; absol., οἱ παρεστῶτες, Luk.19:24; before αὐτῷ, Act.23:2, 4; of time, Mrk.4:29 __4. to stand by for help or defence (Hom., Dem., Xen., al.): with dative of person(s), Rom.16:2, 2Ti.4:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύνανταί

한글 발음: 뒤난타이

dunantai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNI-3P
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σοι

한글 발음: 소이

soi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2DS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὧν

한글 발음: 혼

hōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GPN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νυνὶ

한글 발음: 뉘니

nuni

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3570 원어 검색에서 보기 G3570
Lemma
νυνί
Strong
G3570
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이제/지금
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이제, 지금' (νῦν 강조형).

원문 정의 보기

νῦνί an Attic strengthened form of νῦν (in cl. always of time, and most often strictly of the pres.), [in LXX : Job.5:1-27, Psa.2:1-12, 1-12, 4Ma.4:1-26, Ep. Je* ;] now; __1. of time: with praes., Act.24:13, Rom.15:23, 25, 1Co.13:13, 2Co.8:11 8:22, Phm 9 11; with pf., Rom.3:21; with pret., Rom.6:22 11:30 (WH, mg.) Rom.7:6, Eph.2:13, Col.1:21 3:8; ἡ ν. ἀπολογία, Act.22:1. __2. Of logical sequence (not so in cl.): Rom.7:17, 1Co.5:11 (νῦν, WH) 1Co.12:18 (νῦν, WH, txt.) 1Co.15:20, Heb.8:6 (νῦν, WH, txt.), Heb.9:26 (cf. WM, 24, 579n).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατηγοροῦσίν

한글 발음: 카테고루신

katēgorousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2723 원어 검색에서 보기 G2723
Lemma
κατηγορέω
Strong
G2723
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
고발하다/고소하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고발하다, 고소하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατηγορέω, -ῶ (κατά, ἀγορεύω), [in LXX: Dan LXX 6:5, (9), 1Ma.7:6 1Mac 7:25, 2Ma.4:47 2Mac 10:13 2Mac 10:21, 4Ma.9:14 * ;] to make accusation, accuse, __(a) in general: absol., Rom.2:15; with genitive of person(s) (cl., WM, 254), Jhn.5:45; irreg. with accusative of person(s), Rev.12:10; __(b) before a judge: absol., Act.24:2, 19; with genitive of person(s), Mat.12:10, Mrk.3:2, Luk.6:7 11:54 (WH, txt., R, om.), Luk.23:2, 10, Jhn.8:6 Act.25:5 28:19; id. with accusative of thing(s) (cl., but see WM, l.with), Mrk.15:3-4; with genitive of thing(s) (Dem.), Act.24:8 25:11; before περί, with genitive of thing(s) (Thuc., viii, 85), Act.24:13; with accusative of thing(s), before κατά with genitive of person(s) (WM, § 28, 1), Luk.23:14. Pass. (B1., § 54, 3), before ὑπό with genitive, Mat.27:12, Act.22:30; ὁ κατηγορούμενος, Act.25:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μου.

한글 발음: 무

mou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But this I confesse vnto thee, that after the way which they call heresie, so worship I the God of my fathers, beleeuing all things which are written in the Law and the Prophets,

원어

ὁμολογῶ

한글 발음: 호몰로고

homologō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3670 원어 검색에서 보기 G3670
Lemma
ὁμολογέω
Strong
G3670
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
고백하다/시인하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고백하다, 시인하다, 약속하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ὁμολογέω, -ῶ (ὁμόλογος, of one mind: Dan LXX Su 1:60 *), [in LXX: Job.40:9 (14) (יָדָה hi.), Jer.44:25 (נָדַר), al. ;] __1. to speak the same language (Hdt.). __2. to agree with (Hdt., Plat., al.). __3. to agree, confess, acknowledge (Plat., al.) : absol., Jhn.1:20 12:42; pass., Rom.10:10; before ὅτι, ib., Heb.11:13; with accusative of thing(s), Act.23:8, 1Jn.1:9, Rev.3:5; id. with dative of person(s), Act.24:14; with accusative cogn., 1Ti.6:12; with accusative of person(s), 1Jn.2:23 Jn 4:3; id. before pred. accusative (Bl., § 34, 5; 73, 5), Jhn.9:22, Rom.10:9, 1Jn.4:2 Jn 4:15, 2Jn.7; with inf. (M, Pr., 229), Tit.1:16; with dative of person(s) before ὅτι, Mat.7:23; before ἐν, with dative of person(s) (M, Pr., 104; Bl., § 41, 2), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8. __4. to agree, promise: τ. ἐπαγγελίαν, Act.7:17; with inf. obj. (Bl., § 61, 3), Mat.14:7. __5. = ἐξμολογέω, to praise: Heb.13:15 (Westc., in l). (cf. ἀνθ-ομολογέομοι, ἐξμολογέω.) † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦτό

한글 발음: 투토

touto

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σοι

한글 발음: 소이

soi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2DS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὁδὸν

한글 발음: 호돈

hodon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3598 원어 검색에서 보기 G3598
Lemma
ὁδός
Strong
G3598
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '길, 도(道), 여정'.

원문 정의 보기

ὁδός, -οῦ, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for דֶּרֶךְ ;] __1. a way, path, road: Mat.2:12, Mrk.10:46, Luk.3:5 al.; κατὰ τὴν ὁ., Luk.10:4, al.; παρὰ τὴν ὁ., Mat.13:4, al.; with genitive of person(s), (subj.), τὴν ὁ. ἑτοιμάζειν (fig.), Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, al.; with genitive term. (obj.), ἐθνῶν, Mat.10:5; τ. ἁγίων (figuratively), Heb.9:8; accusative, ὁδόν, with force of prep. (like Heb. דֶּרֶךְ; Bl., §34, 8; 35, 5), ὁ. θαλάσσης, Mat.4:15 (LXX). __2. A traveller's way, journey: ἐν τ. ὁ., Mat.5:25, Mrk.8:27, al.; ἐξ ὁ., Luk.11:6; εἰς ὁ., Mat.10:10; τ. ὁδὸν πορεύεσθαι, Act.8:39; ὁ. ἡμέρας, Luk.2:44; ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (= cl., ὁ. ποιεῖσθαι; V. Field, Notes, 25), to make one's way, i.e. proceed on one's journey, Mrk.2:23. __3. Metaphorical (cl.; but esp. frequently in Heb.; see Cremer, 442ff.), of a course of conduct, a way of thinking or acting: Act.14:16, 1Co.4:17 12:31, Jas.1:8 5:20; τοῦ Κάϊν, Ju 11; τ. Βαλαάμ, 2Pe.2:15; εἰρήνης, Rom.3:17; ζωῆς, Act.2:28; ἡ ὁ. ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τ. ζωήν (Dalman, Words, 160), Mat.7:14; τ. δικαιοσύνης, Mat.21:32; σωτηρίας, Act.16:17; αἱ ὁ. τ. θεοῦ (κυρίου), Act.13:10, Rom.11:33, Rev.15:3 (cf. Hos.14:9 Psa.94 (95):10, Sir.39:24, al.); ἡ ὁ. τ. θεοῦ (the way approved by God), Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14, Luk.20:21; id., of the Christian religion, Act.18:26; so, absol., ἡ ὁ., Act.9:2 19:9, 23 24:22; of Christ as the means of approach to God, Jhn.14:6. __4. Ellipsis of ὁ.: ποίας (sc. ὁδοῦ), Luk.5:19; ἐκείνης, ib. 19:4 (see Bl., §36, 13; 44, 1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἣν

한글 발음: 헨

hēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASF
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγουσιν

한글 발음: 레구신

legousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αἵρεσιν

한글 발음: 하이레신

airesin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G139 원어 검색에서 보기 G139
Lemma
αἵρεσις
Strong
G139
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
분파/이단
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '파당, 분파, 이단'.

원문 정의 보기

αἵρεσις, -εως, ἡ (αἱρέω, -ομαι), [in LXX for נְדָבָה,] __1. capture. __2. choosing, choice (see MM, VGT, see word). __3. that which is chosen, hence, opinion; esp. a peculiar opinion, heresy: 1Co.11:19, Gal.5:20, 2Pe.2:1 R, txt. __4. In late writers (MM, VGT), of a set of persons professing particular principles or opinions, a school, sect, party, faction: Act.5:17 15:5 24:5,14 26:5 28:22, I Co, Ga, II Pe, l.with, R, mg. (Cremer, 614). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὕτως

한글 발음: 후토스

houtōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3779 원어 검색에서 보기 G3779
Lemma
οὕτως
Strong
G3779
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이와 같이
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이와 같이, 그렇게'.

원문 정의 보기

οὕτως, rarely (Bl., §5, 4; WH, App., 146f.) οὕτω, adv. (οὗτος), [in LXX chiefly for כֵּן ;] in this way, so, thus; __1. referring to what precedes: Mat.5:16 6:30, Mrk.10:43 14:59, Luk.1:25 2:48 15:7, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:15, 1Co.8:12, al.; οὕτως καί, Mat.17:12, Mrk.13:29, al.; pleonastically, resuming a ptcp. (cl.; see Bl., §74, 6), Act.20:11 27:17. __2. Referring to what follows: Mat.1:18 6:9, Luk.19:31, Jhn.21:1, 1Pe.2:15; bef. quotations from OT, Mat.2:5, Act.7:6, 1Co.15:45, Heb.4:4. __3. C. adj. (marking intensity): Heb.12:21, Rev.16:18; similarly with adv., Gal.1:6 (cl.). __4. As a predicate (Bl., §76, 1): Mat.1:18 9:33, Mrk.2:1, 2 4:26, Rom.4:18 9:20, I Pe 2:15; οὕ ἔχειν (Lat. sic or ita se habere), Act.7:1, al.; ἐκαθέζετο (as he was, without delay or preparation), Jhn.4:6. __5. In comparison, with correlative adv.: καθάπερ . . . οὕ., Rom.12:4, 5 al.; καθὼς . . . οὕ., Luk.11:30, al.; οὕ. . . . καθώς, Luk.24:24, al.; ὡς . . . οὕ., Rom.5:15, al.; οὕ . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, al; ὥσπερ . . . οὕ., Mat.12:40, al.; οὕ. . . . οὕ., 1Co.7:7. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λατρεύω

한글 발음: 라트레우오

latreuō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3000 원어 검색에서 보기 G3000
Lemma
λατρεύω
Strong
G3000
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
섬기다/예배하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '섬기다, (제의적으로) 예배하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λατρεύω (λάτρις, a hired servant), [in LXX (always, as λατρεία, of the service of God or of heathen divinities) chiefly for עָבַד, Exo.3:12, al.; in Dan LXX TH (Dan.3:12, al.) for פְּלַח ;] __1. to work for hire. __2. to serve; in cl., also of divine service, to serve, worship, and so always in NT: with dative of person(s), τ. θεῷ, Mat.4:10, Luk.4:8" (LXX), Act.7:7 24:14 27:23, Heb.9:14, Rev.7:15 22:3; of idol worship (cf. Exo.20:5, Eze.20:32), Act.7:42, Rom.1:25; τ. θεῷ. ἐν τ. πνεύματί μου, Rom.1:9; id. ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει, 2Ti.1:3; μετ᾽ εὐλαβείας κ. δέους, Heb.12:28; ἐν ὁσιότητι κ. δικαιοσύνῃ, Luk.1:74; (without θεῷ) νηστείαις κ. δεήσεσι, Luk.2:37; πνεύματι θεοῦ, Php.3:3; absol., Act.26:7; ὁ λατρεύων, the worshipper, Heb.9:9 10:2; of ministerial service, with dative of thing(s), Heb.8:5 13:10.† SYN.: λειτουργέω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πατρῴῳ

한글 발음: 파트로오

patrōō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3971 원어 검색에서 보기 G3971
Lemma
πατρῷος
Strong
G3971
형태소
A-DSM
품사
형용사
조상의/조상 적부터의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '조상의, 선조로부터 전해진'.

원문 정의 보기

πατρῷος, -α, -ον (πατήρ), [in LXX: Pro.27:10 (אָב), Est.7:5, 2 -4Ma.12:1-19 * ;] of one's fathers, received from one's fathers: Act.22:3 24:14 28:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεῷ

한글 발음: 테오

theō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-DSM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιστεύων

한글 발음: 피스테우온

pisteuōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πᾶσιν

한글 발음: 파신

pasin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-DPN
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατὰ

한글 발음: 카타

kata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμον

한글 발음: 노몬

nomon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προφήταις

한글 발음: 프로페타이스

prophētais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4396 원어 검색에서 보기 G4396
Lemma
προφήτης
Strong
G4396
형태소
N-DPM
품사
명사
선지자/예언자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '선지자, 예언자'.

원문 정의 보기

προφήτης, -ου, ὁ [πρόφημι, to speak forth), [in LXX chiefly for נָבִיא ;] one who acts as an interpreter or forth-teller of the Divine will (see Lft., Notes, 83f.; Tr., Syn., §vi), a prophet; __1. in cl. (Æsch., Hdt., Plat., al.), of the interpreters of oracles. __2. In NT, __(a) of the OT prophets: Mat.5:12, Mrk.6:15, Luk.4:27, Jhn.8:52, Rom.11:3, al.; __(b) of prophets in general: Mat.10:41 13:57 21:46, Mrk.6:4, Luk.13:33, al.; __(with) of John the Baptist: Mat.21:26, Mrk.6:15, Luk.1:76; __(d) of Christ: Mat.21:11, Jhn.6:14, Act.3:22, 23 7:37" (LXX) ; __(e) of Christian prophets in the apostolic age: Act.15:32, 1Co.12:28, Eph.2:20, al.; __(f) by meton., of the writings of prophets: Luk.24:27, Act.8:28, al.; __(g) of a poet: Tit.1:12 (on the use of the term in π. and Inscr., see Deiss., BS, 235f.; MM, xxii). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γεγραμμένοις,

한글 발음: 게그람메노이스

gegrammenois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1125 원어 검색에서 보기 G1125
Lemma
γράφω
Strong
G1125
형태소
V-RPP-DPN
품사
동사
쓰다/기록하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '쓰다, 기록하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γράφω, [in LXX chiefly for כּתב ]; __1. to scrape, graze (Hom.), and later (Hdt.) to sketch, draw. __2. to write; __(a) of forming or tracing letters on writing material: Jhn.8:[6], Gal.6:11, 2Th.3:17; __(b) to express in writing, commit to writing, record: Luk.1:63, Jhn.19:21, 22 Rev.1:11, 19 al.; of scripture as a standing authority (Deiss., BS, 112ff.), γέγραπται, it stands written (Luther), Mat.4:4, Mrk.7:6, Luk.4:8, Rom.1:17, 1Co.1:31, al.; id. before ἐν, Mrk.1:2, Act.1:20, al.; with accusative, to write of: Jhn.1:46, Rom.10:5; before περί, Mat.26:24, Mrk.14:21, Jhn.5:46; al.; with dative (WM, §31, 4), Luk.18:31; id. before ἵνα (M, Pr., 207f.), Mrk.12:19, Luk.20:28; κατὰ τ. γεγραμμένον, 2Co.4:13; γεγραμμένον ἐστί, Jhn.2:17; ἐγράφη, Rom.4:24; ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα, Jhn.12:16; __(with) of writing directions or information, with dative of person(s): Rom.15:15, 2Co.7:12, al.; __(d) of that which contains the record or message: βιβλίον, Mrk.10:4, Jhn.21:25, Rev.5:1; τίτλον, Jhn.19:19; ἐπιστολήν, Act.23:25; ἐντολήν, Mrk.10:5 (cf. ἀπο-, ἐγ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And haue hope towards God, which they themselues also allow, that there shall be a resurrection of the dead, both of the iust and vniust.

원어

ἐλπίδα

한글 발음: 엘피다

elpida

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1680 원어 검색에서 보기 G1680
Lemma
ἐλπίς
Strong
G1680
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
소망/희망
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소망, 희망'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐλπίς (ἑλ-, Rom.8:20, WH, see Bl., § 4, 3; M, Pr., 44), -ίδος, ἡ [in LXX for בָּטַח and its derivatives, תִּקְוָה (frequently in Jb), etc. ;] expectation (in cl., rarely of evil, mostly of good, and so always in NT), hope; __1. of hope in general: 2Co.1:6; with genitive obj., Act.16:19; art. inf., Act.27:20, 1Co.9:10; παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, Rom.4:18; ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, 1Co.9:10. __2. Of religious hope: ἐπ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Act.2:26 26:6, Rom.4:18 8:20, Tit.1:2; τῇ ἐ. ἐσώθημεν, Rom.8:24; κατ᾽ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου, Tit.3:7; of the Messianic hope of Israel, Act.23:6 26:6-7 28:20; of Christian hope, Rom.5:2-5 12:12 15:4, 13, 1Co.13:13, 2Th.2:16, Heb.3:6 6:11 7:19 10:23, 1Pe.1:3 1:21 3:15; with genitive obj., Rom.5:2, Col.1:27, 1Th.1:3 5:8, Tit.1:2; with genitive of that on which the hope is based, Act.26:6, Eph.1:18 4:4, Col.1:23; ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἐ., Rom.15:13; ἔχειν ἐ. (= cl. ἐλπίζειν), Act.24:15, Rom.15:4, 2Co.3:12 10:15, Eph.2:12, 1Th.4:13; before ἐπί, with dative, 1Jn.3:3; εἰς, Act.24:15; ὅτι, Rom.8:20, Php.1:20-21. Meton., __(a) of the author or ground of hope (cl.): 1Th.2:19, 1Ti.1:1; with genitive obj., Col.1:27; __(b) of the thing hoped for: Gal.5:5, Col.1:5, Tit.2:13, Heb.6:18 (Cremer, 252, 712).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχων

한글 발음: 에콘

echōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεὸν

한글 발음: 테온

theon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-ASM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἣν

한글 발음: 헨

hēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASF
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοὶ

한글 발음: 아우토이

autoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτοι

한글 발음: 후토이

houtoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NPM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προσδέχονται,

한글 발음: 프로스데콘타이

prosdechontai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4327 원어 검색에서 보기 G4327
Lemma
προσδέχομαι
Strong
G4327
형태소
V-PNI-3P
품사
동사
기다리다/영접하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '기다리다, 받아들이다, 영접하다'.

원문 정의 보기

προσ-δέχομαι [in LXX chiefly for רָצָה ;] __1. to receive to oneself, receive favourably, admit, accept: with accusative of person(s), Luk.15:2, Rom.16:2, Php.2:29; with accusative of thing(s), Act.24:15 (R, mg.), Heb.10:34 11:35. __2. to expect, look for, wait for: with accusative of person(s), Luk.12:36; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.15:43, Luk.2:25, 38 23:51, Act.23:21, Tit.2:13, Ju 21 (cf. δέχομαι).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνάστασιν

한글 발음: 아나스타신

anastasin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G386 원어 검색에서 보기 G386
Lemma
ἀνάστασις
Strong
G386
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
부활
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '부활, 일어남'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀνά-στασις, -εως, ή (ἀνίστημι), [in LXX: Zep.3:8 (קוּם), La 3:63 (קִימָה), קִימָה), Psa.66:1-20 title., Dan LXX 11:20, 2Ma.7:14 2Mac 12:43 * ;] __1. a raising up, awakening, rising (in Inscr. of the erection of a monument, see MM, VGT, see word): Luk.2:34. __2. a rising from the dead (see DCG, ii, 605b); __(a) of Christ: Act.1:22 2:31 4:33 Rom.6:5, Php.3:10, 1Pe.3:21; ἐξ ἀ. νεκρῶν, Rom.1:4 (ICC, in l); ἐκ νεκρῶν, 1Pe.1:3; __(b) of persons in OT hist. (e.g. 3Ki.17:17 ff.): Heb.11:35; __(with) of the general resurrection: Mat.22:23, 28 22:30 Mrk.12:18, 23 Luk.20:27, 33 20:36, Jhn.11:24, Act.17:18 23:8 24:15, 2Ti.2:18; ἀ. ἐκ νεκρῶν, Luk.20:35, Act.4:2; τῶν νεκρῶν, Mat.22:31, Act.17:32 23:6 24:21 26:23, 1Co.15:12-13 15:21 15:42, Heb.6:2; ἀ. ζωῆς, resurrection to life (cf. 2Ma.7:14, ἀ. εἰς ζωήν) and ἀ. τ. κρίσεως, τ. to judgment, Jhn.5:29; ἀ. τ. δικαίων, Luk.14:14; κρείττων ἀ., Heb.11:35; on ἡ ἀ. ἡ πρώτη, Rev.20:5-8, see Swete, in l, Weste. on Jhn.5:1-47, but see also Thayer, see word; by meton. of Christ as Author of ἀ., Jhn.11:25 (see DB, iv, 231; Cremer, 307).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μέλλειν

한글 발음: 멜레인

mellein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3195 원어 검색에서 보기 G3195
Lemma
μέλλω
Strong
G3195
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
~하려 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막 ~하려 하다, 장차 ~할 것이다'.

원문 정의 보기

μέλλω, [in LXX: Job.3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] to be about to be or do; __1. with inf. (Bl., §62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114); __(a) of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: with inf. praes., Mat.2:13, Luk.10:1, Act.3:3 5:35, Heb.8:5, 2Pe.1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; with inf. aor. (Bl., §58, 3), Act.12:6, Rev.3:16; __(b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty: with inf. praes., Mat.16:27, Luk.9:31, Jhn.6:71, Rom.4:24, al.; with inf. aor., Rom.8:18, Gal.3:23, Rev.3:2 12:4. __2. Ptcp., ὁ μέλλων: absol., Rom.8:38, 1Co.3:22; τὰ μ., Col.2:17; εἰς τὸ μ. (Field, Notes, 65); with subst., Mat.3:7 12:32 (ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μ.; LXX for עַד), Act.24:25, 1Ti.4:8, Heb.2:5, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔσεσθαι

한글 발음: 에세스타이

esesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-FDN
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νεκρῶν

한글 발음: 네크론

nekrōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3498 원어 검색에서 보기 G3498
Lemma
νεκρός
Strong
G3498
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
죽은/죽은 자
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '죽은'; 명사 '죽은 자'.

원문 정의 보기

νεκρός, -α, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for מֵת ;] dead, __I. as adj., __1. prop.: Act.5:10 20:9, Jas.2:26, Rev.1:18, al.; ὡσεὶ ν., Mat.28:4, Mrk.9:26, Rev.1:17; of that which is subject to death, Rom.8:10. __2. Metaphorical, __(a) of persons: Luk.15:24, 32; of those immersed in worldly cares, Mat.8:22, Luk.9:60; of spiritual death, Jhn.5:25, Rom.6:13, Eph.5:14, Rev.3:1; τ. παραπτώμασιν, Eph.2:1, 5 Col.2:13; of the opposite condition, ν. τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Rom.6:11; __(b) of things regarded as inoperative, devoid of power: ἁμαρτία, Rom.7:8; πίστις, Jas.2:17, 26; ἔργα, Heb.6:1 9:14. __II. As subst., νεκρός, ὁ (Hom., al.), chiefly in pl. (οἱ) ν., the dead: Mat.11:5, Mrk.12:26, Luk.20:37, 1Co.15:15, al.; ἀνάστασις (τ.) νεκρῶν, Mat.22:31, Act.17:32, al.; ν. . . . ζῶντες, Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:27, Act.10:42, al.; ἀπὸ νεκρῶν, Luk.16:30; ἐκ ν., Mrk.6:14, Luk.24:46, Jhn.12:1, Act.13:34, Rom.10:7, al.; πρωτότοκος ἐκ τῶν ν., Col.1:18; ζωὴ ἐκ ν., Rom.11:15; constr. praegn., ἐκ ν. ζῶντες, Rom.6:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δικαίων

한글 발음: 디카이온

dikaiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1342 원어 검색에서 보기 G1342
Lemma
δίκαιος
Strong
G1342
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
의로운
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '의로운, 올바른'.

원문 정의 보기

δίκαιος, -α, -ον (δίκη), [in LXX chiefly for צַדִּיק (for rendering of צַדִּיק in sense of correct, see Deiss., BS, 115 f.); sometimes for נָקִי as Pro.1:11, al. ;] in early Gk. writers __(a) of persons, observant of δίκη, custom, rule, right, righteous in performing duties to gods and men ; __(b) of things, righteous, in accordance with right. In NT __1. righteous, chiefly in the broad sense, as above, of the person or thing corresponding to the Divine standard of right __(a) of persons: of God, Rom.3:26, 1Jn.2:29 Jn 3:7; of Christ, Act.3:14 7:52 22:14, 1Pe.3:18, 1Jn.2:1; of men, Mat.1:19 (Abbott, Essays, 75 f.) Mat.10:41 13:17, 43 13:49, Luk.1:6, 17, Rom.5:7, 1Ti.1:9, Jas.5:6, 1Pe.3:12, 1Jn.3:7, Rev.22:11, al.; δ. καὶ εὐλαβής, Luk.2:25; ἅγιος, Mrk.6:20; ἀγαθός, Luk.23:50; φοβούμενος τ. θεόν, Act.10:22; opposite to ἀμαρτωλοὶ καὶ ἀσεβεῖς, 1Pe.4:18; ἄδικοι, Mat.5:45, Act.24:15; δ. ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.1:17, Gal.3:11, Heb.10:38" (LXX) ; δ. παρὰ τ. θεῷ, Rom.2:13 __(b) of things: ἔργα δ., opposite to πονηρὰ, 1Jn.3:12; ἐντολή, Rom.7:12; metaphorically, αἷμα, Mat.23:35; τὸ δ., Luk.12:57; δ. ἐστιν, Act.4:19, Eph.6:1, Php.1:7; ὅ, Mat.20:4; ὅσα, Php.4:8 __2. In narrower sense __(a) of persons, as in later cl. writers, just, rendering to each his due: Tit.1:8, 1Jn.1:9; δ. κριτής, 2Ti.4:8 __(b) of things: τὸ δ., Col.4:1; δ., sc. ἐστιν, 2Th.1:6; κρίσις δ., Jhn.5:30; ὁδοί, Rev.15:3 SYN.: ἀγαθός (which see), καλός, χρηστός (Cremer, 183, 690). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδίκων·

한글 발음: 아디콘

adikōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G94 원어 검색에서 보기 G94
Lemma
ἄδικος
Strong
G94
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
불의한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '불의한, 옳지 않은'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄδικος, -ον (δίκη), [in LXX for שׁקר, עול, etc. ;] __1. unjust: Rom.3:5, Heb.6:10. __2. unrighteous, wicked: Luk.16:11 18:11, Act.24:15, 1Co.6:1,9 1Pe.3:18; opposite to δίκαιος, Mat.5:45; to εὐσεβής, 2Pe.2:9; to πιστός, Luk.16:10 (Cremer, 200). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And herein doe I exercise my selfe to haue alwayes a conscience void of offence toward God, and toward men.

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτῳ

한글 발음: 투토

toutō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-DSN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸς

한글 발음: 아우토스

autos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀσκῶ

한글 발음: 아스코

askō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G778 원어 검색에서 보기 G778
Lemma
ἀσκέω
Strong
G778
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
힘쓰다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '힘쓰다, 애쓰다, 단련하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀσκέω, -ῶ [in LXX: 2Ma.15:4 * ;] __1. to adorn (poët.). __2. to practise, exercise (Hdt., Xen.). __3. to endeavour (Xen., al.): with inf., Act.24:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπρόσκοπον

한글 발음: 아프로스코폰

aproskopon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G677 원어 검색에서 보기 G677
Lemma
ἀπρόσκοπος
Strong
G677
형태소
A-ASF
품사
형용사
거리낌 없는/책망할 것 없는
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '거치는 것이 없는, 흠 없는'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπρόσκοπος, -ον (προσκόπτω), [in LXX: Sir.32:21, 3Ma.3:8 * ;] __1. act., not causing to stumble: metaphorically, of not leading others into sin, 1Co.10:32. __2. Pass., not stumbling, without offence, blameless: Act.24:16, Php.1:10 (for exx., see MM, see word).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

συνείδησιν

한글 발음: 쉬네이데신

suneidēsin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4893 원어 검색에서 보기 G4893
Lemma
συνείδησις
Strong
G4893
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
양심
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '양심'.

원문 정의 보기

συν-είδησις, -εως, ἡ (συνεῖδον), [in LXX: Ecc.10:20 (מַדָּע), Wis.17:11, Sir.42:18 א * ;] __1. consciousness: with genitive obj., Heb.10:2, 1Pe.2:19. __2. In ethical sense, innate discernment, self-judging consciousness, conscience (Stoics and late writers): Rom.2:15 9:1, 1Co.10:29, 2Co.1:12 4:2 5:11, 1Ti.4:2, Heb.9:14; σ. ἀγαθή, Act.23:1, 1Ti.1:5 1:19, 1Pe.3:16 3:21; ἀσθενής, 1Co.8:7 8:10; ἀσθενοῦσα, 1Co.8:12; ἀπρόσκοπος, Act.24:16; καθαρά, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:3; καλή, Heb.13:18; πονηρά, Heb.10:22; ὁ νοῦς καὶ ἡ σ., Tit.1:15; διὰ τὴν σ., Rom.13:5, 1Co.10:25 10:27-28; κατὰ σ., Heb.9:9; ὑπὸ (τῆς) σ., Jhn.8:1-59 [9] (Rec.), 1Co.10:29 (cf. Cremer, 233 ff.; ICC on Rom.2:15; DB, i, 468 ff.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχειν

한글 발음: 에케인

echein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεὸν

한글 발음: 테온

theon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-ASM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

한글 발음: 투스

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνθρώπους

한글 발음: 안트로푸스

anthrōpous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παντός.¶

한글 발음: 판토스

pantos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-GSM
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Now after many yeeres, I came to bring almes to my nation, & offrings:

원어

δι᾽

한글 발음: 디

di᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐτῶν

한글 발음: 에톤

etōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2094 원어 검색에서 보기 G2094
Lemma
ἔτος
Strong
G2094
형태소
N-GPN
품사
명사
해/년
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '해, 년'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔτος, -ους, τό [in LXX for שָׁנֶה ;] a year: Luk.3:1, Heb.1:12, Rev.20:3, al.; ἔτη ἔχειν, Jhn.5:5 8:57; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, ἐτῶν, Mrk.5:42, Luk.2:42, Act.4:22, 1Ti.5:9; dative pl. of space of time, Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; accusative, in ans. to how long? Mat.9:20, Mrk.5:25, Luk.2:36, Act.7:6, Heb.3:9, al.; preceded by a prep.: dim, Luk.8:43, Rom.15:23; διά, with genitive (see: διά), Act.24:17, Gal.2:1; ἐκ, Act.24:10; εἰς, Luk.12:19; ἐπί, with accusative, Act.19:10; μετά, with accusative, Gal.1:18 3:17; πρό, with genitive, 2Co.12:2; κατ᾽ ἔτος, yearly, Luk.2:41 SYN.: ἐνιαυτός, which see; cf. LS, see word ἐνιαυτός (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πλειόνων

한글 발음: 플레이오논

pleionōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4119 원어 검색에서 보기 G4119
Lemma
πλείων, πλεῖον
Strong
G4119
형태소
A-GPN-C
품사
형용사
더 많은/더 큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '더 많은, 더 큰' (πολύς의 비교급).

원문 정의 보기

πλέον, see: πολύς. πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλεημοσύνας

한글 발음: 엘레에모쉬나스

eleēmosunas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1654 원어 검색에서 보기 G1654
Lemma
ἐλεημοσύνη
Strong
G1654
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
구제/자선
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '구제, 자선, 적선'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐλεημοσύνη, -ης, ἡ (ἐλεέω), [in LXX chiefly for חֶסֶד, צְדָקָה ;] __1. mercy, pity. __2. almsgiving, alms (like the German Almosen, a corruption of the Greek word ἐ): Mat.6:4; ποιεῖν ἐ., Mat.6:2-3, Act.9:36 10:2 24:17; ἐ. διδόναι, Luk.11:41 (cf. Mat.23:36; Dalman, Words, 62 f.) 12:33; αἰτεῖν, Act.3:2; λαβεῖν, Act.3:3; πρὸς (in order to ask) ἐ., Act.3:10; pl., Act.10:4, 31 (Cremer, 711).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιήσων

한글 발음: 포이에손

poiēsōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-FAP-NSM
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔθνος

한글 발음: 에트노스

ethnos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1484 원어 검색에서 보기 G1484
Lemma
ἔθνος
Strong
G1484
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
이방인/민족
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '민족, 백성'; 복수로 '이방인'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔθνος, -ους, τό, [in LXX chiefly for עַם ,גּוֹי ;] __1. a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.). __2. a nation, people: Mat.21:43 24:7, Mrk.13:8, Luk.22:25, Act.10:35, al.; in sing., of the Jewish people, Luk.7:5 23:2, Jhn.11:48, 50-53 18:35, Act.10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19. __3. In pl., as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mat.4:15 6:32, Act.26:17, Rom.3:29 11:11 15:10, Gal.2:8, al.; of Gentile Christians, Rom.11:13 15:27 16:4, Gal.2:12, 14, Eph.3:1. SYN.: λαός (see DCG, ii, 229; Cremer, 226). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μου

한글 발음: 무

mou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρεγενόμην

한글 발음: 파레게노멘

paregenomēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3854 원어 검색에서 보기 G3854
Lemma
παραγίνομαι
Strong
G3854
형태소
V-2ADI-1S
품사
동사
이르다/도착하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '이르다, 도착하다, 나타나다'.

원문 정의 보기

παρα-γίνομαι (Ion. and late for -γίγν-), [in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא ;] __1. to be beside or at hand (Hom., Hdt., al.), hence, to stand by, sup­port (Æsch., Thuc., al.) : with dative of person(s), 2Ti.4:16. __2. to come, come up, arrive (Hdt., Xen., al., and frequently in later writers; see MM, xviii; Thackeray, Gr., 267.2): absol., Luk.14:21 19:16, Jhn.3:23, Act.5:21-22, 25 9:39 10:32-33 11:23 14:27 17:10 18:27 21:18 23:16, 35 24:17, 24 25:7 28:21, 1Co.16:3; before εἰς, Jhn.8:2, Act.9:26 15:4; ἐπί, with accusative, Luk.22:52; πρός, with accusative, Luk.7:4, 20 8:19, Act.20:18; id. before ἐκ, Luk.11:6; παρά, with genitive, Mrk.14:43; ἀπὸ . . . εἰς, Mat.2:1, Act.13:14; ἀπὸ . . . ἐπὶ . . . πρός, Mat.3:13; of a teacher coming forward in public: Mat.3:1, Luk.12:51, Heb.9:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προσφοράς,

한글 발음: 프로스포라스

prosphoras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4376 원어 검색에서 보기 G4376
Lemma
προσφορά
Strong
G4376
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
제물/예물
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '드림, 제물, 예물'.

원문 정의 보기

προσ-φορά, -ᾶς, ἡ (προσφέρω), [in LXX: 3Ki.7:48 (פָּנִים) Psa.40:6 (מִנְחָה), I Est.5:52, Sir.14:11, al. ;] __1. a bringing to, offering (Plat., al.). __2. (Less frequently in cl.), a present, an offering; in NT, of sacrificial offerings: Act.21:26 24:17, Eph.5:2, Heb.10:5, 8 10:14; περί ἀμαρτίας, Heb.10:18; with genitive obj., Rom.15:16, Heb.10:10.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Wherupon certaine Iewes from Asia found me purified in the Temple, neither with multitude, nor with tumult:

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αἷς

한글 발음: 하이스

hais

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-DPF
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὗρόν

한글 발음: 휴론

heuron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡγνισμένον

한글 발음: 헤그니스메논

hēgnismenon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G48 원어 검색에서 보기 G48
Lemma
ἁγνίζω
Strong
G48
형태소
V-RPP-ASM
품사
동사
깨끗하게 하다/성결케 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '정결케 하다, 깨끗하게 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἁγνίζω (> ἁγνός), [in LXX always ceremonially, chiefly for קָדַשׁ ;] to purify, cleanse from defilement; __(a) ceremonially: Jhn.11:55, Act.21:24, 26 24:18; __(b) morally: Jas.4:8, 1Pe.1:22, 1Jn.3:3. † SYN.: καθαρίζω, which see (and see: ἁγνός). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱερῷ

한글 발음: 히에로

hi'erō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2411 원어 검색에서 보기 G2411
Lemma
ἱερόν
Strong
G2411
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
성전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '성전' (성전 구역 전체).

원문 정의 보기

ἱερός, -ά, όν [in LXX: Eze.28:18 (מִקְדָּשׁ); τό ἱ, 1Ch.29:4 (בַּיִת), Eze.45:19 (עֲזָרָה); very frequently in I Est.1:1-58 -4 Mac ;] __1. in Hom., marvellous, mighty, divine. __2. (Also in Hom, and later cl.) consecrated to the deity, sacred: pl., ἱ. γράμματα, 2Ti.3:15. __3. As subst., __(a) (so in Hom.), τὰ ἱ., sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: 1Co.9:13; __(b) later, τὸ ἱ.,., a consecrated or sacred place, a temple: τ. Ἀρτέμιδος, Act.19:27; of the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part thereof (as distinct from ὁ ναός, which see, the Sanctuary proper): 1Co.9:13, and frequently in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mat.12:6, Mrk.13:3, Act.4:1, al. (on the use of ἱ. in Imperial Iuser., see Deiss., LAE, 380 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλου

한글 발음: 오클루

ochlou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδὲ

한글 발음: 우데

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θορύβου,

한글 발음: 토뤼부

thorubou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2351 원어 검색에서 보기 G2351
Lemma
θόρυβος
Strong
G2351
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
소동/소란
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소동, 소란, 떠듦'.

원문 정의 보기

θόρυβος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX for הָמוֹן, etc. ;] a noise, uproar, tumult, as of an excited mob: Mat.26:5 27:24, Mrk.14:2, Act.20:1 21:34 24:18; of mourners, = ὄχλος θορυβούμενος, Mrk.5:38.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Who ought to haue beene here before thee, and obiect, if they had ought against me.

원어

οὓς

한글 발음: 후스

hous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-APM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔδει

한글 발음: 에데이

edei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1163 원어 검색에서 보기 G1163
Lemma
δεῖ
Strong
G1163
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~해야 한다
번역 정렬
-

정의

비인칭 동사 '~해야 한다, 마땅하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δεῖ impersonal (δέω), [in LXX chiefly for infin. with לְ ;] one must, it is necessary: with inf., Mat.26:54, Mrk.13:7, Act.5:29, al.; with accusative and inf., Mat.16:21, Mrk.8:31, Jhn.3:7, Act.25:10, al.; with ellipse of accusative, Mat.23:23; of accusative, and inf., Mrk.13:14, Rom.1:27 8:26; οὐ (μὴ) δεῖ (non licet), ought not, must not: Act.25:24, 2Ti.2:24; impf., ἔδει, of necessity or obligation in past time regarding a past event (Bl., § 63, 4), Mat.18:33, Luk.15:32, Jhn.4:4, Act.27:21, al.; periphr., δέον ἐστίν (as in Attic, χρεών ἐστι = χρή, see: δέον), Act.19:36; id., with ellipse of ἐστίν, 1Pe.1:6 τὰ μὴ δέοντα (= ἃ οὐ δεῖ 1Ti.5:13. SYN.: ὀφείλει, expressing moral obligation, as distinct from δεῖ, denoting logical necessity and χρή, a need which results from the fitness of things (see Tr., Syn., § cvii, 10; Westc. on Heb.2:1, 1Jn.2:6; Hort on Jas.3:10). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

한글 발음: 에피

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σοῦ

한글 발음: 수

sou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρεῖναι

한글 발음: 파레이나이

pareinai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3918 원어 검색에서 보기 G3918
Lemma
πάρειμι
Strong
G3918
형태소
V-2PAN
품사
동사
있다/임하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '곁에 있다, 임하다, 와 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

πάρ-ειμι [in LXX for בּוֹא, etc. ;] __1. to be by, at hand or present; __(a) of persons: Rev.17:8; παρών (opposite to ἀπών), 1Co.5:3, 2Co.10:2 10:11 13:2 13:10; before ἐπί with genitive, Act.24:19; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:33; ἐνθάδε, Act.17:6; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Act.12:20, 2Co.11:8, Gal.4:18, 20; __(b) of things : of time, ὁ καιρός, Jhn.7:6; τ. παρόν, Heb.12:11; ἡ ἀλήθεια, 2Pe.1:12; ταῦτα, 2Pe.1:9; τ. παρόντα, Heb.13:5. __2. to have come or arrived (Hdt., Thuc., al.; see Field, Notes, 65) : Luk.13:1, Jhn.11:28, Act.10:21; before εἰς, Col.1:6; before ἐπί, with accusative of thing(s), Mat.26:50 (cf. συν-πάρειμι).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατηγορεῖν,

한글 발음: 카테고레인

katēgorein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2723 원어 검색에서 보기 G2723
Lemma
κατηγορέω
Strong
G2723
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
고발하다/고소하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '고발하다, 고소하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατηγορέω, -ῶ (κατά, ἀγορεύω), [in LXX: Dan LXX 6:5, (9), 1Ma.7:6 1Mac 7:25, 2Ma.4:47 2Mac 10:13 2Mac 10:21, 4Ma.9:14 * ;] to make accusation, accuse, __(a) in general: absol., Rom.2:15; with genitive of person(s) (cl., WM, 254), Jhn.5:45; irreg. with accusative of person(s), Rev.12:10; __(b) before a judge: absol., Act.24:2, 19; with genitive of person(s), Mat.12:10, Mrk.3:2, Luk.6:7 11:54 (WH, txt., R, om.), Luk.23:2, 10, Jhn.8:6 Act.25:5 28:19; id. with accusative of thing(s) (cl., but see WM, l.with), Mrk.15:3-4; with genitive of thing(s) (Dem.), Act.24:8 25:11; before περί, with genitive of thing(s) (Thuc., viii, 85), Act.24:13; with accusative of thing(s), before κατά with genitive of person(s) (WM, § 28, 1), Luk.23:14. Pass. (B1., § 54, 3), before ὑπό with genitive, Mat.27:12, Act.22:30; ὁ κατηγορούμενος, Act.25:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἴ

한글 발음: 에이

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1487 원어 검색에서 보기 G1487
Lemma
εἰ
Strong
G1487
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일/~인지
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사 '만일 ~라면'. 간접의문 '~인지'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. __I. Conditional, if; __1. with indic, expressing a general assumption; __(a) pres.: before indic, pres., Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al.; before imperat., Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al.; before fut. indic., Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al.; before pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al.; similarly, before impf., Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst., Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; __(b) fut.: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; __(with) pf.: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al.; __(d) aor.: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. __2. Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. __3. Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf., aor. or plpf., before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). __4. C. indic., after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. __5. C. indic., as in LXX (Num.14:3o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11" (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). __6. Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. __II. Interrogative, if, whether. __1. As in cl., in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc.: with indic. pres., Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al.; fut., Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al.; aor., Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al.; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. __2. As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al.; see WM, 639f.; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr., WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. __III. With other particles. __1. εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. __2. εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. __3. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. __4. εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. __5. καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί __6. εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort., Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl., §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __7. εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. __8. εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. __9. εἴτε . . . εἴτε, whether . . . or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τι

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-ASN
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχοιεν

한글 발음: 에코이엔

echoien

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAO-3P
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμέ.

한글 발음: 에메

eme

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Or else let these same here say, if they haue found any euill doing in mee, while I stood before the Councill,

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοὶ

한글 발음: 아우토이

autoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτοι

한글 발음: 후토이

houtoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NPM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰπάτωσαν

한글 발음: 에이파토산

eipatōsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAM-3P
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἴ

한글 발음: 에이

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1487 원어 검색에서 보기 G1487
Lemma
εἰ
Strong
G1487
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일/~인지
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사 '만일 ~라면'. 간접의문 '~인지'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. __I. Conditional, if; __1. with indic, expressing a general assumption; __(a) pres.: before indic, pres., Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al.; before imperat., Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al.; before fut. indic., Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al.; before pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al.; similarly, before impf., Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst., Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; __(b) fut.: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; __(with) pf.: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al.; __(d) aor.: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. __2. Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. __3. Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf., aor. or plpf., before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). __4. C. indic., after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. __5. C. indic., as in LXX (Num.14:3o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11" (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). __6. Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. __II. Interrogative, if, whether. __1. As in cl., in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc.: with indic. pres., Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al.; fut., Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al.; aor., Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al.; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. __2. As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al.; see WM, 639f.; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr., WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. __III. With other particles. __1. εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. __2. εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. __3. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. __4. εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. __5. καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί __6. εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort., Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl., §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __7. εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. __8. εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. __9. εἴτε . . . εἴτε, whether . . . or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τί

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-ASN
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὗρον

한글 발음: 휴론

heuron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμοὶ

한글 발음: 에모이

emoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1DS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδίκημα

한글 발음: 아디케마

adikēma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G92 원어 검색에서 보기 G92
Lemma
ἀδίκημα
Strong
G92
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
불의한 행위/죄
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '불의한 행위, 죄, 악행'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδίκημα, -τος, τό (ἀδικέω), [in LXX for עָוֹן, פֶּשַׁע, etc. ;] a wrong, injury, misdeed (MM, VGT, see word): Act.18:14 24:20, Rev.18:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

στάντος

한글 발음: 스탄토스

stantos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2476 원어 검색에서 보기 G2476
Lemma
ἵστημι
Strong
G2476
형태소
V-2AAP-GSM
품사
동사
서다/세우다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '서다, 세우다, 굳게 서다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, see word; Bl., §23, 2; M, Pr., 55), [in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni., hi., יצב hith., etc.]. __I. Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass. __1. to make to stand, to place, set, set up, establish, appoint: with accusative of person(s), Mrk.7:9, Act.1:23 6:13 17:31, Heb.10:9; id. before ἐπί, with accusative loc, Mat.4:5, Luk.4:9; ἐν μέσῳ, Mat.18:2, Mrk.9:36, Jhn.8:[3]; ἐνώπιον, Act.6:6; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Luk.9:47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mat.25:33; mid., to place oneself, to stand: Rev.18:15; so also pass., to be made to stand, to stand: Mat.2:9, Luk.11:18 19:8, 2Co.13:1, al. __2. to set in a balance, to weigh (cl.; LXX for שׁקל, Isa.46:6, al.): Mat.26:15, __II. Intrans., in pf., plpf. (with sense of present and impf.; M, Pr., 147f.) and 2 aor. act., to stand, stand by, stand still: Mat.20:32 26:73, Mrk.10:49, Luk.8:44, Jhn.1:35 3:29, Act.16:9, al.; before ἐν, Mat.6:5, al.; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:30, al.; πρός, with dative loc., Jhn.18:16; ἐπί, with genitive loc., Luk.6:17, Act.5:23 25:10, al.; ἔμπροσθεν, Mat.27:11; κύκλῳ, Rev.7:11; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Luk.1:11; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.13:2, Rev.3:20; παρά, Luk.5:2; ἐκεῖ, Mrk.11:5; ὧδε, Mrk.9:1; ὅπου, Mrk.13:14; ἔξω, Mat.12:46; μακρόθεν, Luk.18:13; πόρρωθεν, Luk.17:12. Metaphorical, to stand ready, stand firm, be steadfast: 1Co.7:37 10:12, Eph.6:11, 13 14, Col.4:12; τ. πίστει, Rom.11:20; ἐν τ. ἀληθείᾳ, Jhn.8:44; εν τ. χάριτι, Rom.5:2; ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ, 1Co.15:1 (cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-ἀν-, ἐξ-ἀν, ἀνθ-, ἀφ-, δι-, ἐν-, ἐξ-, ἐπ- (-μαι), ἐφ-, κατ-ἐφ-, συν-ἐφ-, καθ-, ἀντι-καθ-, ἀπο-καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, συν-ίστημι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μου

한글 발음: 무

mou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπὶ

한글 발음: 에피

epi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

συνεδρίου,

한글 발음: 쉬네드리우

sunedriou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4892 원어 검색에서 보기 G4892
Lemma
συνέδριον
Strong
G4892
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
공회/산헤드린
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '공회, 의회 (산헤드린)'.

원문 정의 보기

συνέδριον, -ου, τό (σύν + ἕδρα, a seat) [in LXX: Pro.11:13 15:22, Jer.15:17 (סוֹד), Psa.26:4 (מַת), Pro.22:10 (דִּין) Pro.26:26 (קָהָל); Pro.24:7 27:22 31:23, 2Ma.14:5, 4Ma.17:17 * ;] __1. a council (Plat., Xen., al.; LXX; in π., σ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων, Deiss., BS, 156): of a local Jewish tribunal, Mat.10:17, Mrk.13:9. __2. The supreme ecclesiastical court of the Jews, the Sanhedrin (i.e. Talmudic סַנְהֵדְרִין = συνέδριον): Mat.5:22 26:59, Mrk.14:55 15:1, Luk.22:66, Act.5:21, 27 5:34, 41 6:12, 15 22:30 23:1, 6 23:15, 20 23:28 (WH, R, mg., om.) Act.24:20 of a meeting of the Sanhedrin, Jhn.11:47; of the place of meeting, Act.4:15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Except it be for this one voice, that I cried standing among them, Touching the resurrection of the dead I am called in question by you this day.

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μιᾶς

한글 발음: 미아스

mias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1520 원어 검색에서 보기 G1520
Lemma
εἷς
Strong
G1520
형태소
A-GSF
품사
형용사
하나/한
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '하나, 한 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἷς ιά, ἕν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, cardinal numeral, one; __1. one, as opposite to many: Mat.25:15, Rom.5:12, 1Co.10:8, al.; as subst., Rom.5:15, Eph.2:14; id. with genitive partit., Mat.5:19, al.; before ἐκ (ἐξ), Mrk.14:18, Jhn.6:8, al.; metaphorically, of union and concord, Jhn.10:30 17:11, Rom.12:4-5, Php.1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Luk.14:18; with neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one, none (cl.), Mat.5:18 10:29, Luk.11:46 12:6. __2. Emphatically, to the exclusion of others; __(a) a single (one): Mat.21:24, Mrk.8:14; absol., 1Co.9:24, al.; οὐδὲ εἷς, Mat.27:14, Jhn.1:3, Rom.3:10, al.; __(b) one, alone: Mrk.2:7 10:18, Luk.18:19; __(with) one and the same: Rom.3:30, 1Co.3:8 11:5 12:11, 1Jn.5:8. __3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = τις or indef. art. (of. Heb. אֶחָד, Gen.22:13, al.; see B1., § 45, 2; M, Pr., 96 f.): Mat.8:19 19:6, Rev.8:13, al.; εἷς τις (Bl., l.with), Luk.22:50, Jhn.11:49 __4. Distributively: εἷς καστος (cl.), Luk.4:40, Act.2:6, al.; εἷς . . . καὶ εἷς (cl., εἷς μὲν . . . εἷς δέ), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.20:12, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. אֶחָד, Exo.17:12, al); ὁ εἷς . . . ὁ ἕτερος (ἄλλος) = cl. ὁ μὲν (ἕτερος) . . . ὁ δέ (ἕτερος), Mat.6:24, Luk.7:41, Rev.17:10; καθ᾽ εἷς, εἷς κ. είς (in which καθ᾽ is adverbial, or the expression formed from the analogy of ἕν καθ᾽ ἔν; M, Pr., 105), one by one, severally: Mrk.14:19, Rom.12:5, al.; εἷς τὸν ἕνα = ἀλλήλους (B1., 45, 2; M, Pr., 246), 1Th.5:11. __5. As ordinal = πρῶτος (like Heb. אֶחָד; Bl., § 45, 1; M, Pr., 95 f.), first: Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταύτης

한글 발음: 타우테스

tautēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-GSF
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φωνῆς

한글 발음: 포네스

phōnēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5456 원어 검색에서 보기 G5456
Lemma
φωνή
Strong
G5456
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
소리/음성
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '소리, 음성'.

원문 정의 보기

φωνή, -ῆς, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for קוֹל ;] a voice; __(a) prop., of persons, Mat.2:18 (LXX), al.; φ. αἴρειν (ἐπαίρειν), Luk.17:13, Act.2:14, al.; φ. μεγάλῃ εἰπεῖν (λέγειν, φωνεῖν, etc.), Luk.8:28, Act.7:57, Rev.5:12, al.; γίνεται (ἔρχεται) φ. ἐκ τ. οὐρανῶν (ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), Mrk.1:11, Luk.3:22, Jhn.12:28, al. (cf. DCG, ii, 810a; Dalman, Words, 204f.); ἀκούειν φωνήν (-ῆς; see: ἀκούω), Act.9:4, 7 al.; φ. βοῶντος, Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, Luk.3:4, Jhn.1:23" (LXX) ; τ. θεοῦ, Jhn.5:37, Heb.3:7, al. By meton., __(α) of the speaker, βλέπειν τὴν φ., Rev.1:12; __(β) speech, language ( Gen.11:1, 4Ma.12:7, al.): 1Co.14:10; __(b) of inanimate things: Mat.24:31, Jhn.3:8, Act.2:6, Rev.1:15b 9:9 14:2, al. (cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxix). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἧς

한글 발음: 헤스

hēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GSF
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκέκραξα

한글 발음: 에케크라크사

ekekraxa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2896 원어 검색에서 보기 G2896
Lemma
κράζω
Strong
G2896
형태소
V-AAI-1S
품사
동사
외치다/부르짖다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '외치다, 부르짖다'.

원문 정의 보기

κράζω [in LXX for זָעַק, צָעַק, קָרָא, etc. ;] in cl. chiefly poët., __1. prop. onomatop., of the raven, to croak, hence generally, of inartic. cries, to scream, cry out (Æsch., al.): Mrk.5:5 9:26 15:39 (Rec., R, mg.), Luk.9:39, al.; of crying for vengeance (cf. Gen.4:10), Jas.5:4. __2. to cry, call out with a loud voice: with accusative of thing(s), Act.19:32; before orat. dir., Mrk.10:48, Luk.18:39, al.; (ἐν) φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, Mrk.5:7, Rev.14:15, al.; λέγων, Mat.8:29, al.; of public teaching, Jhn.1:15, Rom.9:27, al.; of importunate prayer (cf. Job.35:12, Psa.3:5, al.), Rom.8:15, Gal.4:6; pf. with Pres. sense (vernac.; M, Pr., 147), Jhn.1:15 SYN.: see: βοάω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑστὼς

한글 발음: 헤스토스

hestōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2476 원어 검색에서 보기 G2476
Lemma
ἵστημι
Strong
G2476
형태소
V-RAP-NSM
품사
동사
서다/세우다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '서다, 세우다, 굳게 서다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, see word; Bl., §23, 2; M, Pr., 55), [in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni., hi., יצב hith., etc.]. __I. Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass. __1. to make to stand, to place, set, set up, establish, appoint: with accusative of person(s), Mrk.7:9, Act.1:23 6:13 17:31, Heb.10:9; id. before ἐπί, with accusative loc, Mat.4:5, Luk.4:9; ἐν μέσῳ, Mat.18:2, Mrk.9:36, Jhn.8:[3]; ἐνώπιον, Act.6:6; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Luk.9:47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mat.25:33; mid., to place oneself, to stand: Rev.18:15; so also pass., to be made to stand, to stand: Mat.2:9, Luk.11:18 19:8, 2Co.13:1, al. __2. to set in a balance, to weigh (cl.; LXX for שׁקל, Isa.46:6, al.): Mat.26:15, __II. Intrans., in pf., plpf. (with sense of present and impf.; M, Pr., 147f.) and 2 aor. act., to stand, stand by, stand still: Mat.20:32 26:73, Mrk.10:49, Luk.8:44, Jhn.1:35 3:29, Act.16:9, al.; before ἐν, Mat.6:5, al.; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:30, al.; πρός, with dative loc., Jhn.18:16; ἐπί, with genitive loc., Luk.6:17, Act.5:23 25:10, al.; ἔμπροσθεν, Mat.27:11; κύκλῳ, Rev.7:11; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Luk.1:11; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.13:2, Rev.3:20; παρά, Luk.5:2; ἐκεῖ, Mrk.11:5; ὧδε, Mrk.9:1; ὅπου, Mrk.13:14; ἔξω, Mat.12:46; μακρόθεν, Luk.18:13; πόρρωθεν, Luk.17:12. Metaphorical, to stand ready, stand firm, be steadfast: 1Co.7:37 10:12, Eph.6:11, 13 14, Col.4:12; τ. πίστει, Rom.11:20; ἐν τ. ἀληθείᾳ, Jhn.8:44; εν τ. χάριτι, Rom.5:2; ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ, 1Co.15:1 (cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-ἀν-, ἐξ-ἀν, ἀνθ-, ἀφ-, δι-, ἐν-, ἐξ-, ἐπ- (-μαι), ἐφ-, κατ-ἐφ-, συν-ἐφ-, καθ-, ἀντι-καθ-, ἀπο-καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, συν-ίστημι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀναστάσεως

한글 발음: 아나스타세오스

anastaseōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G386 원어 검색에서 보기 G386
Lemma
ἀνάστασις
Strong
G386
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
부활
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '부활, 일어남'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀνά-στασις, -εως, ή (ἀνίστημι), [in LXX: Zep.3:8 (קוּם), La 3:63 (קִימָה), קִימָה), Psa.66:1-20 title., Dan LXX 11:20, 2Ma.7:14 2Mac 12:43 * ;] __1. a raising up, awakening, rising (in Inscr. of the erection of a monument, see MM, VGT, see word): Luk.2:34. __2. a rising from the dead (see DCG, ii, 605b); __(a) of Christ: Act.1:22 2:31 4:33 Rom.6:5, Php.3:10, 1Pe.3:21; ἐξ ἀ. νεκρῶν, Rom.1:4 (ICC, in l); ἐκ νεκρῶν, 1Pe.1:3; __(b) of persons in OT hist. (e.g. 3Ki.17:17 ff.): Heb.11:35; __(with) of the general resurrection: Mat.22:23, 28 22:30 Mrk.12:18, 23 Luk.20:27, 33 20:36, Jhn.11:24, Act.17:18 23:8 24:15, 2Ti.2:18; ἀ. ἐκ νεκρῶν, Luk.20:35, Act.4:2; τῶν νεκρῶν, Mat.22:31, Act.17:32 23:6 24:21 26:23, 1Co.15:12-13 15:21 15:42, Heb.6:2; ἀ. ζωῆς, resurrection to life (cf. 2Ma.7:14, ἀ. εἰς ζωήν) and ἀ. τ. κρίσεως, τ. to judgment, Jhn.5:29; ἀ. τ. δικαίων, Luk.14:14; κρείττων ἀ., Heb.11:35; on ἡ ἀ. ἡ πρώτη, Rev.20:5-8, see Swete, in l, Weste. on Jhn.5:1-47, but see also Thayer, see word; by meton. of Christ as Author of ἀ., Jhn.11:25 (see DB, iv, 231; Cremer, 307).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νεκρῶν

한글 발음: 네크론

nekrōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3498 원어 검색에서 보기 G3498
Lemma
νεκρός
Strong
G3498
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
죽은/죽은 자
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '죽은'; 명사 '죽은 자'.

원문 정의 보기

νεκρός, -α, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for מֵת ;] dead, __I. as adj., __1. prop.: Act.5:10 20:9, Jas.2:26, Rev.1:18, al.; ὡσεὶ ν., Mat.28:4, Mrk.9:26, Rev.1:17; of that which is subject to death, Rom.8:10. __2. Metaphorical, __(a) of persons: Luk.15:24, 32; of those immersed in worldly cares, Mat.8:22, Luk.9:60; of spiritual death, Jhn.5:25, Rom.6:13, Eph.5:14, Rev.3:1; τ. παραπτώμασιν, Eph.2:1, 5 Col.2:13; of the opposite condition, ν. τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, Rom.6:11; __(b) of things regarded as inoperative, devoid of power: ἁμαρτία, Rom.7:8; πίστις, Jas.2:17, 26; ἔργα, Heb.6:1 9:14. __II. As subst., νεκρός, ὁ (Hom., al.), chiefly in pl. (οἱ) ν., the dead: Mat.11:5, Mrk.12:26, Luk.20:37, 1Co.15:15, al.; ἀνάστασις (τ.) νεκρῶν, Mat.22:31, Act.17:32, al.; ν. . . . ζῶντες, Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:27, Act.10:42, al.; ἀπὸ νεκρῶν, Luk.16:30; ἐκ ν., Mrk.6:14, Luk.24:46, Jhn.12:1, Act.13:34, Rom.10:7, al.; πρωτότοκος ἐκ τῶν ν., Col.1:18; ζωὴ ἐκ ν., Rom.11:15; constr. praegn., ἐκ ν. ζῶντες, Rom.6:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίνομαι

한글 발음: 크리노마이

krinomai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2919 원어 검색에서 보기 G2919
Lemma
κρίνω
Strong
G2919
형태소
V-PPI-1S
품사
동사
판단하다/심판하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '판단하다, 심판하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב ,דּין, etc. ;] __1. to separate, select, choose (cl.; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). __2. to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. __3. to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf., Act.16:15; with accusative and pred., Act.13:46 26:8. __4. to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf., Act.21:25 27:1. __5. to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol., Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ., Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss., LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al.; pass., Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. __6. = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30" (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. __7. As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern ( 4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. __8. to bring to trial (cl.); mid., to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, συν-, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σήμερον

한글 발음: 세메론

sēmeron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4594 원어 검색에서 보기 G4594
Lemma
σήμερον
Strong
G4594
형태소
ADV
품사
-
오늘
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '오늘'.

원문 정의 보기

σήμερον (Att.. τήμερον), adv., [in LXX for יוֹם ;] to-day: Mat.6:11, Luk.4:21, Act.4:9, al.; opposite to αὔριον, Mat.6:30, Luk.12:28, Jas.4:13; χθὲς καὶ σ. καὶ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας, Heb.13:8; ἡ σ. ἡμέρα, Act.20:20; ἕως (ἄχρι) τῆς σ. ἡμέρας, Rom.11:8, 2Co.3:14; μέχρι (ἕως) τῆς σ. (sc. ἡμέρας), Mat.11:23 27:8; as subst., τὸ σ., Heb.3:13; id. in appos., ὁρίζει ἡμὶραν, σ., Heb.4:7 R, mg., (see Westc., in l) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐφ᾽

한글 발음: 에프

eph᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμῶν.¶

한글 발음: 휴몬

humōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And when Felix heard these things, hauing more perfect knowledge of that way, he deferred them and said, When Lysias the chiefe captaine shall come downe, I will know the vttermost of your matter.

원어

Ἀκούσας

한글 발음: 아쿠사스

Akousas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAP-NSM
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἀνεβάλετο

한글 발음: 아네발레토

Anebaleto

원어 사전 정의 보기 G306 원어 검색에서 보기 G306
Lemma
ἀναβάλλω
Strong
G306
형태소
V-2AMI-3S
품사
동사
미루다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '연기하다, 미루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀνα-βάλλω [in LXX: Psa.78:21 89:38 (עָבַר), 1Ki.28:14, Psa.104:2 (עָטָה) ;] to defer, put off (MM, VGT, see word): mid., Act.24:22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοὺς

한글 발음: 아우투스

autous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-APM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκριβέστερον

한글 발음: 아크리베스테론

akribesteron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G197 원어 검색에서 보기 G197
Lemma
ἀκριβέστερον
Strong
G197
형태소
A-ASN-C
품사
형용사
더 정확히
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '더 자세히, 더 정확히' (비교급).

원문 정의 보기

ἀκριβῶς adv. (ἀκριβής), [in LXX: Deu.19:18 (יָטַב), Da TH 7:19 (יְצֵב), Eze.39:14, Wis.19:18, Sir.18:29 ;] with exactness, carefully: Mat.2:8, Luk.1:3, Act.18:25, Eph.5:15, 1Th.5:2 (M, Th., in l). Compar., ἀκριβέστερον (Milligan, NTD, 111; MM, VGT, see word), Act.18:26 23:15, 20 24:22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰδὼς

한글 발음: 에이도스

eidōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-RAP-NSM
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

한글 발음: 타

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὁδοῦ

한글 발음: 호두

hodou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3598 원어 검색에서 보기 G3598
Lemma
ὁδός
Strong
G3598
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '길, 도(道), 여정'.

원문 정의 보기

ὁδός, -οῦ, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for דֶּרֶךְ ;] __1. a way, path, road: Mat.2:12, Mrk.10:46, Luk.3:5 al.; κατὰ τὴν ὁ., Luk.10:4, al.; παρὰ τὴν ὁ., Mat.13:4, al.; with genitive of person(s), (subj.), τὴν ὁ. ἑτοιμάζειν (fig.), Mat.3:3, Mrk.1:3, al.; with genitive term. (obj.), ἐθνῶν, Mat.10:5; τ. ἁγίων (figuratively), Heb.9:8; accusative, ὁδόν, with force of prep. (like Heb. דֶּרֶךְ; Bl., §34, 8; 35, 5), ὁ. θαλάσσης, Mat.4:15 (LXX). __2. A traveller's way, journey: ἐν τ. ὁ., Mat.5:25, Mrk.8:27, al.; ἐξ ὁ., Luk.11:6; εἰς ὁ., Mat.10:10; τ. ὁδὸν πορεύεσθαι, Act.8:39; ὁ. ἡμέρας, Luk.2:44; ὁδὸν ποιεῖν (= cl., ὁ. ποιεῖσθαι; V. Field, Notes, 25), to make one's way, i.e. proceed on one's journey, Mrk.2:23. __3. Metaphorical (cl.; but esp. frequently in Heb.; see Cremer, 442ff.), of a course of conduct, a way of thinking or acting: Act.14:16, 1Co.4:17 12:31, Jas.1:8 5:20; τοῦ Κάϊν, Ju 11; τ. Βαλαάμ, 2Pe.2:15; εἰρήνης, Rom.3:17; ζωῆς, Act.2:28; ἡ ὁ. ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τ. ζωήν (Dalman, Words, 160), Mat.7:14; τ. δικαιοσύνης, Mat.21:32; σωτηρίας, Act.16:17; αἱ ὁ. τ. θεοῦ (κυρίου), Act.13:10, Rom.11:33, Rev.15:3 (cf. Hos.14:9 Psa.94 (95):10, Sir.39:24, al.); ἡ ὁ. τ. θεοῦ (the way approved by God), Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14, Luk.20:21; id., of the Christian religion, Act.18:26; so, absol., ἡ ὁ., Act.9:2 19:9, 23 24:22; of Christ as the means of approach to God, Jhn.14:6. __4. Ellipsis of ὁ.: ποίας (sc. ὁδοῦ), Luk.5:19; ἐκείνης, ib. 19:4 (see Bl., §36, 13; 44, 1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἴπας·

한글 발음: 에이파스

eipas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAP-NSM
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅταν

한글 발음: 호탄

hotan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3752 원어 검색에서 보기 G3752
Lemma
ὅταν
Strong
G3752
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~할 때마다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~할 때(마다), ~하면'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅταν (for ὅτ᾽ ἄν = ὅτε ἄν), temporal particle, with a conditional sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future; __1. prop., whenever; __(a) (a) with subjc. praes.: Mat.6:2, 5 Mrk.14:7, Luk.11:36, Jhn.7:27, Act.23:35, 1Co.3:4, al.; ἕως τ. ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅ., Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25; before τότε, 1Th.5:3; __(b) with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185): Mat.5:11, Mrk.4:15, Luk.6:22, Jhn.2:10 8:28 (Field, Notes, 94), 10:4, al. __2. As in Hom. (LS, see word), but not in cl. prose, with indic., when (M, Pr., 167f.; Bl., §65, 9): with impf., Mrk.3:11(cf. Gen.38:9, al.); with praes., Mrk.11:25; with fut.. Rev.4:9 (Swete, in l.); with aor., Mrk.11:19, Rev.8:1 (Swete, in ll.; M, Pr., 168, 248; Field, Notes, 35). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Λυσίας

한글 발음: 뤼시아스

Lusias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3079 원어 검색에서 보기 G3079
Lemma
Λυσίας
Strong
G3079
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
루시아
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '루시아'.

원문 정의 보기

Λυσίας, -ου, ὁ Lysias (Claudius L., Act.23:26), Act.24:7, 22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χιλίαρχος

한글 발음: 킬리아르코스

chiliarchos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5506 원어 검색에서 보기 G5506
Lemma
χιλίαρχος
Strong
G5506
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
천부장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '천부장, 군대 지휘관'.

원문 정의 보기

χιλίαρχος (in Hdt., al., -ης), -ου, ὁ (χίλιοι, ἄρχω) [in LXX chiefly for אַלּוּף שַׂר ;] a chiliarch, the commander of a thousand, esp. a Roman military tribune, the commander of a cohort: Jhn.18:12, Act.21:31-33, 37 22:24-29 23:10, 15 23:17-19, 22 24:7, 22 25:23; more generally, of officers of similar rank, Mrk.6:21, Rev.6:15 19:18 (see, DB, i, 352b; DCG, i, 271a, 307a).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καταβῇ,

한글 발음: 카타베

katabēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2597 원어 검색에서 보기 G2597
Lemma
καταβαίνω
Strong
G2597
형태소
V-2AAS-3S
품사
동사
내려가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '내려가다, 내려오다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατα-βαίνω [in LXX chiefly for יָרַד ;] to go or come down, descend. __1. Of persons: Mat.3:16 24:17, Luk.2:51 6:17 10:31 17:31 19:5-6, Jhn.4:47, 49 4:51 5:7, Act.7:34 8:15 10:20 20:10 23:10 24:1, 22 Eph.4:10. before ἀπό, Mat.8:1 14:29 27:40, 42 Mrk.3:22 15:30, Luk.10:30, Jhn.6:38, Act.25:7, 1Th.4:16; ἐκ, Mat.17:9; ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ, Mat.28:2, Mrk.9:9, Jhn.1:32 3:13 6:33, 41-42 6:50-51, 58 Rev.10:1 18:1 20:1; εἰς, Mrk.1:10, Luk.10:30 18:14, Jhn.2:12, Act.7:15 8:38 14:25 16:8 18:22 25:6, Rom.10:7, Eph.4:9; ἐπί, with accusative loc., Jhn.6:16; with accusative of person(s), Luk.3:22, Jhn.1:33, 51; ἐν, Jhn.5:4; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Act.10:21 14:11, Rev.12:12. __2. Of things: σκεῦος, Act.10:11 11:5; βροχή, Mat.7:25, 27; λαῖλαψ, Luk.8:23; before ἀπό, Luk.9:54, Act.8:26, Jas.1:17; ἐπὶ τ. γῆν, Luk.22:44 (WH, R, mg., reject); ἐκ τ. οὐρανοῦ before ἀπό, Rev.3:12 21:2, 10; id. before εἰς, Rev.13:13; ἐπί, with accusative of person(s), Rev.16:21. Fig., κ. ἕως ᾄδον, Mat.11:23, Luk.10:15, WH, txt., Tr., mg. (καταβιβασθήση, T, WH, mg., RV), (cf. συν-καταβαίνω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διαγνώσομαι

한글 발음: 디아그노소마이

diagnōsomai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1231 원어 검색에서 보기 G1231
Lemma
διαγινώσκω
Strong
G1231
형태소
V-FDI-1S
품사
동사
판결하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '자세히 알아 판결하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δια-γινώσκω (see previous word), [in LXX chiefly for ידע, and cf. 2Ma.9:15 ;] __1. to distinguish, ascertain exactly: Act.23:15 __2. As Athen. law-term, to determine: τὰ καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς, your case, Act.24:22 (Cremer, 673).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

한글 발음: 타

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καθ᾽

한글 발음: 카트

kath᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμᾶς.

한글 발음: 휴마스

humas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And he commanded a Centurion to keepe Paul, and to let him haue libertie, and that he should forbid none of his acquaintance to minister, or come vnto him.

원어

διαταξάμενος

한글 발음: 디아탁사메노스

diataxamenos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1299 원어 검색에서 보기 G1299
Lemma
διατάσσω
Strong
G1299
형태소
V-AMP-NSM
품사
동사
명하다/정하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '명령하다, 지시하다, 제정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δια-τάσσω [in LXX for שׂוּם, שָׁמַר, etc. ;] to charge, give orders to, appoint, arrange, ordain: with dative, Mat.11:1, 1Co.9:14 16:1; before inf., Luk.8:55, Act.18:2. Mid., 1Co.7:17, Act.20:13; with accusative, 1Co.11:34; with dative, Tit.1:5; before inf., Act.7:44 24:23. Pass., τὸ διατεταγμένον, Luk.3:13, Act.23:31; τὰ διαταχθέντα, Luk.17:9-10; διαταγείς, Gal.3:19.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑκατοντάρχῃ

한글 발음: 헤카톤타르케

hekatontarchē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1543 원어 검색에서 보기 G1543
Lemma
ἑκατόνταρχος
Strong
G1543
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
백부장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '백부장'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑκατοντάρχης (-άρχος, Mat.8:5, 8 27:54, Luk.7:2, Act.22:25 28:16; cf. M, Pr., 48); -ου (ἑκατόν, ἄρχω,), [in LXX for מֵאָה שַׂר ;] a centurion: Mat.8:13, Luk.7:6 23:47, Act.10:1, 22 21:32 22:26 23:17, 23 24:23 27:1, 6 27:11, 31 27:43 (cf. κεντυρίως).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τηρεῖσθαι

한글 발음: 테레이스타이

tēreisthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5083 원어 검색에서 보기 G5083
Lemma
τηρέω
Strong
G5083
형태소
V-PPN
품사
동사
지키다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '지키다, 준수하다, 보존하다'.

원문 정의 보기

τηρέω, -ῶ [in LXX for שָׁמַר, נָצַר, etc. ;] __1. to watch over, guard, keep, preserve: Mat.27:36, Act.16:23, al.; ἑαυτόν, 2Co.11:9, 1Ti.5:22, Jas.1:27, Ju 21; before εἰς, Jhn.12:7, Act.25:21, 1Pe.1:4, 2Pe.2:4 2:9 3:7, Ju 6; ἐν, Jhn.17:11-12, Ju 21; ἐκ, Jhn.17:15, Rev.3:10; τ. πίστιν, 2Ti.4:7, Rev.14:12; τ. ἑνότητα τ. πνεύματος, Eph.4:3. __2. to watch, give heed to, observe: τ. σάββατον, Jhn.9:16; τ. ἐντολήν (-άς), Mat.19:17, Jhn.14:15 15:10, 1Ti.6:14, 1Jn.2:3-4 Jn 3:22 Jn 3:24 Jn 5:3, Rev.12:17 14:12; τ. λόγον (-ους), Jhn.8:51-52, 55 14:23-24 15:20 17:6, 1Jn.2:5, Rev.3:8, 10 22:7, 9; τ. νόμον, Act.15:5, Jas.2:10; τ. παράδοσιν, Mrk.7:9; τ. ἔργα, Rev.2:26; τ. γεγραμμένα, Rev.1:3 (cf. δια-, παρα-, συν-τηρέω) SYN.: φυλάσσω, implying custody and protection: τ. expresses the idea of watchful care and "may mark the result of which φ. is the means" (Thayer see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν,

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχειν

한글 발음: 에케인

echein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνεσιν

한글 발음: 아네신

anesin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G425 원어 검색에서 보기 G425
Lemma
ἄνεσις
Strong
G425
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
쉼/평안
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '풀어줌, 쉼, 안위'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνεσις, -εως, ἡ (ἀνίημι), [in LXX: 2Es.4.22 (שָׁלוּ), 2Ch.23:15, I Est.4:62, Wis.13:13, Sir.15:20 26:10 * ;] a loosening, relaxation: Act.24:23 (RV, indulgence; cf. MM, VGT, see word); by St. Paul, opposite to θλίψις, expressed or understood, relief: 2Co.2:12 7:5 8:13, 2Th.1:7.† SYN.: ἀνάπαυσις (which see).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μηδένα

한글 발음: 메데나

mēdena

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3367 원어 검색에서 보기 G3367
Lemma
μηδείς
Strong
G3367
형태소
A-ASM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다' (비직설법).

원문 정의 보기

μηδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (and -θέν, Act.27:33, a Hellenistic form; see Bl., 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58) related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ, no, none, no one; neut., nothing: Mat.16:20, Mrk.5:43 6:8, Luk.3:14, Act.8:24, Rom.13:8, al.; with genitive, Act.4:17 24:23; neut. accusative, μηδέν, adverbially, in no respect, Act.10:20 11:12; as accusative obj. after verb, βλάπτειν, Luk.4:35; ὠφελεῖσθαι, Mrk.5:26; ὑστερεῖν, 2Co.11:5; μεριμνᾶν, Php.4:6; in double negation, strengthening the denial, μηκέτι μ., Mrk.11:14, Act.4:17; μὴ . . . μηδέν (μηδένα, μηδεμίαν), 2Co.13:7, 2Th.2:3, 1Pe.3:6 μηθείς, see. μηδείς (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κωλύειν

한글 발음: 콜뤼에인

kōluein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2967 원어 검색에서 보기 G2967
Lemma
κωλύω
Strong
G2967
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
막다/금하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막다, 금하다, 못하게 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κωλύω (κόλος), [in LXX for כָּלָא, מָנַע, etc. ;] to hinder, re­strain, forbid, withhold: with accusative and inf., Mat.19:14, Luk.23:2, Act.8:36 16:6 24:23, 1Th.2:16, Heb.7:23; inf. om., Mrk.9:38-39 10:14, Luk.9:49-50 11:52 18:16, Act.11:17, Rom.1:13, 3Jn.10; accusative om., 1Ti.4:3; with accusative of person(s) and genitive of thing(s), Act.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), 1Co.14:39, 2Pe.2:16; id. before τοῦ μή, Act.10:47; id. before ἀπό (like Heb. מִן כָּלָא, Gen.23:6, al.), Luk.6:29 (cf. δια-κωλύω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἰδίων

한글 발음: 이디온

idiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2398 원어 검색에서 보기 G2398
Lemma
ἴδιος
Strong
G2398
형태소
A-GPM
품사
형용사
자기의/고유한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '자기 자신의, 고유한'.

원문 정의 보기

ἴδιος, -α, -ον (in Attic usually -ος, -ον), [in LXX chiefly for of person(s) suff., also for לָהֶם, etc.; (τὰ ἴ.) בֵּיתוֹ ;] __1. one's own; __(a) of that which is private and personal (in cl. opposite to κοινός, δημόσιος; cf. infr. 3); __(b) of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opposite to ἀλλότριος; in late writers often, like ἑαυτοῦ, with weakened sense, see M, Pr., 87ff.; Deiss., BS, 123f.): Luk.6:41, Jhn.1:42 5:43, Act.2:6 20:28, 1Co.11:21, Gal.6:5, 2Ti.1:9, Heb.7:27, Ju 6, al.; πράσσειν τὰ ἴ., 1Th.4:11; κατὰ τὰς ἰ. ἐπιθυμίας, 2Ti.4:3; οἱ ἴδιοι, Jhn.1:11 (M, Pr., 90f.; Field, Notes, 84) 13:1, Act.4:23, 1Ti.5:8; τὰ ἴδια, one's home (Field, Notes, l.with), Luk.18:28, Jhn.1:11 16:32 19:27. __2. peculiar, distinct, appropriate, proper: τὸ ἴ. σῶμα, 1Co.15:38; ἐν τ. ἰ. τάγματι, 1Co.15:23; εἰς τ. τόπον τ. ἴ., Act.1:25; = αὐτοῦ (see Deiss., ut. supr.), Mat.22:5, Jhn.1:42 (cf. Wis.10:1). __3. Adverbially (see supr., 1 (a); and cf. WM, 739:2); __(a) ἰδίᾳ, severally, separately: 1Co.12:11; __(b) κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, apart, privately, in private: Mat.14:13, 23 20:17, Mrk.4:34 7:33, Luk.10:23, Act.23:19, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπηρετεῖν

한글 발음: 휘페레테인

hupēretein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5256 원어 검색에서 보기 G5256
Lemma
ὑπηρετέω
Strong
G5256
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
섬기다/수종들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '섬기다, 봉사하다, 수종들다'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπηρετέω, -ῶ (ὑπηρέτης) [in LXX: Wis.16:21, 24-25 19:6, Sir.39:4 * ;] prop., to serve as rower on a ship (Diod., al.). In cl. always metaphorically, to minister to, serve: with dative of person(s), Act.13:36 20:34 24:23.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προσέρχεσθαι

한글 발음: 프로세르케스타이

proserchesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4334 원어 검색에서 보기 G4334
Lemma
προσέρχομαι
Strong
G4334
형태소
V-PNN
품사
동사
나아가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나아가다, 다가오다'.

원문 정의 보기

προσ-έρχομαι [in LXX for קָרַב, נָגַשׁ, etc. ;] to approach, draw near: absol., Mat.4:11, Luk.9:42, al.; with infin., Mat.24:1, al.; with dative loc., Heb.12:18, 22; dative of person(s), Mat.5:1, and freq., Jhn.12:21, al.; ptcp., προσελθών, with indic., Mat.8:2, and freq., Mrk.1:31, Luk.7:14, al.; π. αὐτῷ, with indic., Mat.4:3, Mrk.6:35, Metaphorical, __(a) of approaching God: absol. (Lev.21:17, Deu.21:5, al.), Heb.10:1, 22; τ. θεῷ, Heb.7:25 11:6; τ. θρόνῳ τ. χάριτος, Heb.4:16; πρὸς Χριστόν, 1Pe.2:4; __(b) in sense not found elsewhere (Field, Notes, 211), to consent to: ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις, 1Ti.6:3 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ.¶

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And after certaine dayes, when Felix came with his wife Orusilla, which was a Iew, he sent for Paul, and heard him cocerning the faith in Christ.

원어

Μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

Meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέρας

한글 발음: 헤메라스

hēmeras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τινὰς

한글 발음: 티나스

tinas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-APF
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παραγενόμενος

한글 발음: 파라게노메노스

paragenomenos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3854 원어 검색에서 보기 G3854
Lemma
παραγίνομαι
Strong
G3854
형태소
V-2ADP-NSM
품사
동사
이르다/도착하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '이르다, 도착하다, 나타나다'.

원문 정의 보기

παρα-γίνομαι (Ion. and late for -γίγν-), [in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא ;] __1. to be beside or at hand (Hom., Hdt., al.), hence, to stand by, sup­port (Æsch., Thuc., al.) : with dative of person(s), 2Ti.4:16. __2. to come, come up, arrive (Hdt., Xen., al., and frequently in later writers; see MM, xviii; Thackeray, Gr., 267.2): absol., Luk.14:21 19:16, Jhn.3:23, Act.5:21-22, 25 9:39 10:32-33 11:23 14:27 17:10 18:27 21:18 23:16, 35 24:17, 24 25:7 28:21, 1Co.16:3; before εἰς, Jhn.8:2, Act.9:26 15:4; ἐπί, with accusative, Luk.22:52; πρός, with accusative, Luk.7:4, 20 8:19, Act.20:18; id. before ἐκ, Luk.11:6; παρά, with genitive, Mrk.14:43; ἀπὸ . . . εἰς, Mat.2:1, Act.13:14; ἀπὸ . . . ἐπὶ . . . πρός, Mat.3:13; of a teacher coming forward in public: Mat.3:1, Luk.12:51, Heb.9:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σὺν

한글 발음: 쉰

sun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4862 원어 검색에서 보기 G4862
Lemma
σύν
Strong
G4862
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사 '~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

σύν (old Att. ξύν), prep. with dative, expressing association, fellowship and inclusion. It gradually gave way to μετά, with genitive (cf. LS, see word; Bl., §41, 3), and is therefore comparatively infrequent in NT, being rare in Mat.4, Mrk.6, Jhn.3, and elsewhere (exx. Jas.1:11, 2Pe.1:18) only in Lk (Gosp. and Ac) and Paul. With, together with: of companionship and association, Luk.2:13, Jhn.21:3, Act.10:23, al.; εἶναι σύν τινι, Luk.7:12, Act.4:13, Php.1:23, al.; of partisanship, Act.4:13; οἱ σύν τινι, of attendants, companions or colleagues, Mrk.2:26, Luk.5:9, Act.5:17, al.; of assistance, ἡ χάρις τ. θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί, 1Co.15:10; of two or more things together, almost = καί, Luk.23:11, Act.3:4 10:2 14:5 23:25, Eph.3:18; σὺν Χριστῷ ζῆν, 2Co.13:4; besides (FlJ, LXX), σὺν πᾶσι τούτοις, Luk.24:21. In composition: with (συνχαίρω), together (συνωδίνω), altogether (συντελέω) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Δρουσίλλῃ

한글 발음: 드루실레

Drousillē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1409 원어 검색에서 보기 G1409
Lemma
Δρούσιλλα
Strong
G1409
형태소
N-DSF-P
품사
명사
드루실라
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 인명 '드루실라'(벨릭스의 아내).

원문 정의 보기

Δρούσιλλα (Rec. Δρουσίλλα), ης, ἡ Drusilla, wife of Felix: Act.24:24.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἰδίᾳ

한글 발음: 이디아

idia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2398 원어 검색에서 보기 G2398
Lemma
ἴδιος
Strong
G2398
형태소
A-DSF
품사
형용사
자기의/고유한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '자기 자신의, 고유한'.

원문 정의 보기

ἴδιος, -α, -ον (in Attic usually -ος, -ον), [in LXX chiefly for of person(s) suff., also for לָהֶם, etc.; (τὰ ἴ.) בֵּיתוֹ ;] __1. one's own; __(a) of that which is private and personal (in cl. opposite to κοινός, δημόσιος; cf. infr. 3); __(b) of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opposite to ἀλλότριος; in late writers often, like ἑαυτοῦ, with weakened sense, see M, Pr., 87ff.; Deiss., BS, 123f.): Luk.6:41, Jhn.1:42 5:43, Act.2:6 20:28, 1Co.11:21, Gal.6:5, 2Ti.1:9, Heb.7:27, Ju 6, al.; πράσσειν τὰ ἴ., 1Th.4:11; κατὰ τὰς ἰ. ἐπιθυμίας, 2Ti.4:3; οἱ ἴδιοι, Jhn.1:11 (M, Pr., 90f.; Field, Notes, 84) 13:1, Act.4:23, 1Ti.5:8; τὰ ἴδια, one's home (Field, Notes, l.with), Luk.18:28, Jhn.1:11 16:32 19:27. __2. peculiar, distinct, appropriate, proper: τὸ ἴ. σῶμα, 1Co.15:38; ἐν τ. ἰ. τάγματι, 1Co.15:23; εἰς τ. τόπον τ. ἴ., Act.1:25; = αὐτοῦ (see Deiss., ut. supr.), Mat.22:5, Jhn.1:42 (cf. Wis.10:1). __3. Adverbially (see supr., 1 (a); and cf. WM, 739:2); __(a) ἰδίᾳ, severally, separately: 1Co.12:11; __(b) κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, apart, privately, in private: Mat.14:13, 23 20:17, Mrk.4:34 7:33, Luk.10:23, Act.23:19, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γυναικὶ

한글 발음: 귀나이키

gunaiki

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1135 원어 검색에서 보기 G1135
Lemma
γυνή
Strong
G1135
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
여자/아내
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '여자, 아내'.

원문 정의 보기

γυνή, -αικός, ἡ, [in LXX for אִשָּׁה ;] __1. a woman, married or unmarried: Mat.11:11 14:21, al.; ὕπανδρος γ., Rom.7:2; γ. χήρα, Luk.4:26; in vocat., γύναι implies neither reproof nor severity, but is used frequently as a term of respect and endearment, Mat.15:28, Jhn.2:4, 4:21 19:26. __2. a wife: Mat.1:20, 1Co.7:3, 4 al.; γ. ἀπολύειν, Mrk.10:2, al.; γ. ἔχειν Mrk.6:18; γ. λαβεῖν, Mrk.12:19; γ. γαμεῖν, Luk.14:20. __3. a deaconess, 1Ti.3:11 (CGT, in l.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔσῃ

한글 발음: 우세

ousē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAP-DSF
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίᾳ

한글 발음: 이우다이아

Ioudaia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-DSF-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετεπέμψατο

한글 발음: 메테펨프사토

metepempsato

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3343 원어 검색에서 보기 G3343
Lemma
μεταπέμπω
Strong
G3343
형태소
V-AMI-3S
품사
동사
사람을 보내 부르다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '(중간) 사람을 보내어 청하다, 불러오다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-πέμπω [in LXX (mid.) : Gen.27:45 (לָקַח), Num.23:7 (נָחָה: hi.), 2Ma.15:31, 3Ma.5:18 R, 4Ma.12:3 4Mac 12:6 * ;] to send after or for: pass., Act.10:29 a. Chiefly in mid., to send for, summon Act.10:5, 22 10:29 b Act.11:13 20:1 24:24, 26 25:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Παῦλον

한글 발음: 파울론

Paulon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3972 원어 검색에서 보기 G3972
Lemma
Παῦλος
Strong
G3972
형태소
N-ASM-P
품사
명사
바울
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '바울'.

원문 정의 보기

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus), __1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7. __2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤκουσεν

한글 발음: 에쿠센

ēkousen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Χριστὸν

한글 발음: 크리스톤

Christon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-ASM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦν

한글 발음: 이에순

Iēsoun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-ASM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πίστεως.

한글 발음: 피스테오스

pisteōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4102 원어 검색에서 보기 G4102
Lemma
πίστις
Strong
G4102
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
믿음/신앙
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '믿음, 신앙, 신실함'.

원문 정의 보기

πίστις, -εως, ἡ (πείθω), [in LXX chiefly for אֱמוּנָה ;] __1. in active sense, faith, belief, trust, confidence, in NT always of religious faith in God or Christ or spiritual things: Mat.8:10, Luk.5:20, Act.14:9, Rom.1:8, 1Co.2:5, 2Co.1:24, 1Ti.1:5, al.; with genitive obj., Mrk.11:22, Act.3:16, Rom.3:22, Gal.2:16, Eph.3:12, Jas.2:1, al.; with prep., ἐν, Rom.3:25, Gal.3:26, Eph.1:15, Col.1:24, 1Ti.1:14 3:13, 2Ti.1:13 3:15, 2Pe.1:1; εἰς, Act.20:21 24:24 26:18, Col.2:5, 1Pe.1:21; πρός, 1Th.1:8, Phm 5; ἐπί, with accusative Heb.6:1; ἐν τῇ π. στήκειν (εἶναι, μένειν), 1Co.16:13, 1Co.13:5, 1Ti.2:15; ὑπακοὴ τῆς π., Rom.1:5 16:26; ὁ ἐκ π., Rom.3:26 4:16, Gal.3:12; διὰ (τῆς) π., Rom.3:30, Gal.2:16, Php.3:9. By meton., objectively, that which is the object or content of belief, the faith: Act.6:7 14:22, Gal.1:23 3:23 6:10, Php.1:26, 27 Ju 3, 20, and perh. also Act.13:8 16:5, Rom.1:5 and 16:26 (see supr.), 1Co.16:13, Col.1:23, 2Th.3:2 (Lft., Notes, 125), 1Ti.1:19 3:9 4:1, 6 5:8 6:10, 12, 2Ti.3:8 4:7 Tit.1:4, 13 3:15, 1Pe.5:9. __2. In passive sense, __(a) fidelity, faithfulness: Mat.23:23, Gal.5:22; ἡ π. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rom.3:3; __(b) objectively, plighted faith, a pledge of fidelity: 1Ti.5:12. (On the various shades of meaning in which the word is used in NT, see esp. ICC on Rom.1:17, pp. 31ff.; Lft., Ga., 154ff.; Stevens, Th. NT, 422, 515ff.; DB, i, 830ff.; Cremer, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And as he reasoned of righteousnesse, temperance, and iudgement to come, Felix trembled and answered, Go thy way for this time, when I haue a conuenient season, I will call for thee.

원어

διαλεγομένου

한글 발음: 디알레고메누

dialegomenou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1256 원어 검색에서 보기 G1256
Lemma
διαλέγω
Strong
G1256
형태소
V-PNP-GSM
품사
동사
강론하다/변론하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '강론하다, 토론하다, 변론하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δια-λέγομαι (mid. of διαλέγω, to pick out, distinguish, as depon.), [in LXX: Exo.6:27, Isa.63:1 (דּבר pi.), Jdg.8:1 (ריב), 1Es.8:46, Est.5:2, Sir.14:20, 2Ma.11:20 * ;] to converse with, discourse (see Cl. Rev., i, 45), discuss, argue: Act.18:4 19:8,9 20:9; with dative of person(s), Act.17:17 18:19 20:7, Heb.12:5; before πρός, Mrk.9:34, Act.17:17 24:12; περί Act.24:25, Ju 9; ἀπὸ τ. γραφῶν, Act.17:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δικαιοσύνης

한글 발음: 디카이오쉬네스

dikaiosunēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1343 원어 검색에서 보기 G1343
Lemma
δικαιοσύνη
Strong
G1343
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
의(義)
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '의로움, 정의, 의'.

원문 정의 보기

δικαιοσύνη, -ης, ἡ (δίκαιος), [in LXX chiefly for צֶדֶק, and cognates, Gen.15:6, al., rarely for חֶסֶד, Gen.19:19 ;] the character of ὁ δίκαιος (which see) __1. in broad sense, righteousness, conformity to the Divine will in purpose, thought and action: Mat.5:6, Jhn.16:8, Act.13:10, Rom.4:3; λόγος δικαιοσύνης, teaching of r., Heb.5:13; βασιλεὺς δ. (cf. FlJ, BJ, vi, 10, β. δίκαιος), Heb.7:2; ὅπλα δ., Rom.6:13; ὁδὸς δ., Mat.21:32; θώραξ τῆς δ., Eph.6:14; διὰκονοι δ., 2Co.11:15; ὁσιότης καὶ δ., Luk.1:75, cf. Eph.4:24; ἀγαθωσύνῃ καὶ δ., Eph.5:9; δ. κ. εἰρήνη κ. χαρά, Rom.14:17; δ. κ. ἁγιασμός, 1Co.1:30; opposite to ἁμαρτία, Rom.8:10; ἀνομία, 2Co.6:14; άδικία, Rom.3:5; ποιεῖν τὴν δ., 1Jn.2:29 Jn 3:7; id. as an inclusive term for the active duties of the religious life (ICC, in l; Abbott, Essays, 73 ff), Mat.6:1; ἐργάζεσθαι δ., Act.10:35; διώκειν δ., 1Ti.6:11; πληροῦν πᾶσαν δ., Mat.3:15; ζῆν τῇ δ., 1Pe.2:24; δ. θεοῦ, a righteousness divine in its character and origin, Mat.6:33, Jas.1:20, (where it also includes the idea of God's personal r.; see ICC, on Rom.1:17) Rom.1:17 3:5, 21-26 10:3, 2Co.5:21, Php.3:9; ἡ δ. τ. πίσιεως, Rom.4:11; ἡ ἐκ π. δ., Rom.9:30; ἡ κατὰ π. δ., Heb.11:7; opposite to this is ἡ ἐκ νόμου δ., Rom.10:5; ἡ δ. ἐν ν., Php.3:6; ἡ ἰδία δ., Rom.10:3, cf. Php.3:9 __2. In narrower sense (cf. δίκαιος), justice: Act.17:31, 2Pe.1:1, Rev.19:11 (DCG, ii, 529 ff.; Cremer, 190, 690). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγκρατείας

한글 발음: 엥크라테이아스

egkrateias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1466 원어 검색에서 보기 G1466
Lemma
ἐγκράτεια
Strong
G1466
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
절제
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '절제, 자제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγκράτεια, -ας, ἡ (-ἐγκρατής), [in LXX: Sir.18:15, 30 4Ma.5:34 * ;] __1. prop., mastery, control. __2. (sc. ἑαθτοῦ) self-control: Act.24:25, Gal.5:23, 2Pe.1:6 (see DB, iv, 558b 695a; Page on Ac, l.with). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίματος

한글 발음: 크리마토스

krimatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2917 원어 검색에서 보기 G2917
Lemma
κρίμα
Strong
G2917
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
심판/정죄
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '심판, 판결, 정죄'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίμα (B1., § 27, 2), -τος, τό (κρίνω), [in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁפָּט ;] the issue of a judicial process, hence, __1. judgment, the decision passed on the faults of others: Mat.7:2; in forensic sense, with genitive pun., Luk.24:20; esp. of the judgment of God, Rom.2:2 5:16 11:33 (ICC, in l), 2Pe.2:3, Ju 4; κ. λαμβάνεσθαι, Mat.23:13 (Rec., R, mg.), Mrk.12:40, Luk.20:47, Rom.13:2, Jas.3:1; ἔχειν, 1Ti.5:12; βαστάζειν, Gal.5:10; ἐσθίειν ἑαυτῷ, 1Co.11:29; εἰς κ. συνέρχεσθαι, 1Co.11:34; εἶναι ἐν τ αὐτῷ κ., Luk.23:40; with genitive obj., Rom.3:8, 1Ti.3:6, Rev.17:1; of God's judgment through Christ, Jhn.9:39; τὸ κ. ἄρχεται, 1Pe.4:17; τ. κ. τ. μέλλον, Act.24:25; κ. αἰώνιον, Heb.6:2; ἔκρινεν ὁ Θεὸς τ. κ. ὐμῶν, Rev.18:20; of the right of judgment, Rev.20:4. __2. a matter for judgment, a law-suit, a case: 1Co.6:7.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μέλλοντος

한글 발음: 멜론토스

mellontos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3195 원어 검색에서 보기 G3195
Lemma
μέλλω
Strong
G3195
형태소
V-PAP-GSN
품사
동사
~하려 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막 ~하려 하다, 장차 ~할 것이다'.

원문 정의 보기

μέλλω, [in LXX: Job.3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] to be about to be or do; __1. with inf. (Bl., §62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114); __(a) of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: with inf. praes., Mat.2:13, Luk.10:1, Act.3:3 5:35, Heb.8:5, 2Pe.1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; with inf. aor. (Bl., §58, 3), Act.12:6, Rev.3:16; __(b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty: with inf. praes., Mat.16:27, Luk.9:31, Jhn.6:71, Rom.4:24, al.; with inf. aor., Rom.8:18, Gal.3:23, Rev.3:2 12:4. __2. Ptcp., ὁ μέλλων: absol., Rom.8:38, 1Co.3:22; τὰ μ., Col.2:17; εἰς τὸ μ. (Field, Notes, 65); with subst., Mat.3:7 12:32 (ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μ.; LXX for עַד), Act.24:25, 1Ti.4:8, Heb.2:5, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔσεσθαι

한글 발음: 에세스타이

esesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-FDN
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔμφοβος

한글 발음: 엠포보스

emphobos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1719 원어 검색에서 보기 G1719
Lemma
ἔμφοβος
Strong
G1719
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
두려워하는
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '두려워하는, 무서워하는'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔμ-φοβος [in LXX: Sir.19:24, 1Ma.13:2 * ;] __1. terrible. __2. in fear (of Godly fear, Sir.19:24), terrified: Luk.24:5, 37, Act.10:4 24:25, Rev.11:13.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γενόμενος

한글 발음: 게노메노스

genomenos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1096 원어 검색에서 보기 G1096
Lemma
γίνομαι
Strong
G1096
형태소
V-2ADP-NSM
품사
동사
되다/일어나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '되다, 생기다, 일어나다, 발생하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.), [in LXX chiefly for היה ;] __1. of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jhn.1:15 8:58, 1Co.15:37; a first appearance in public, Mrk.1:4, Jhn.1:6, al.; before ἐκ (of birth), Rom.1:3, Gal.4:4; διά, Jhn.1:3; βροντή, Jhn.12:29; σεισμός, Rev.6:12; γογγυσμός, Act.6:1; χαρά, Act.8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Luk.22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Mrk.11:19; πρωΐα, Mat.27:1; νύξ, Act.27:27. __2. Of events, to come to pass, take place, happen: Mat.5:18, Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:20 2:15, Act.4:21, 2Ti.2:18, al.; μὴ γένοιτο [LXX for חָלִילָה, Jhn.22:29, al.], far be it, God forbid: Rom.3:4 (ICC, in l.), 1Co.6:15 and frequently in Pl.; καὶ ἐγένετο, ἐγένετο δέ ([in LXX for וַיְהִי ;] see Burton, 142 f.; M, Pr., 16f.; Dalman, Words, 32 f.; Robertson, Gr., 1042 f.), with indic, Mat.7:28, Luk.1:8, al.; before καί and indic., Luk.8:1, Act.5:7, al.; with accusative and inf., Mrk.2:23, Luk.3:21, al.; ὡς δὲ ἐγένετο, before τοῦ with inf., Act.10:25; with dative of person(s), to befall one: with inf., Act.20:16; with accusative and inf., Act.22:6; with adv., εὖ, Eph.6:3; τ́ ἐγένετο αὐτῷ (Field, Notes, 115), Act.7:40 (LXX); before εἰς, Act.28:6. __3. to be made, done, performed, observed, enacted, ordained, etc.: Mat.6:10 19:8, Mrk.2:27 11:23, Act.19:26, al.; before διά with genitive, Mrk.6:2, Act.2:43; ὑπό, Luk.13:17; ἐκ, Luk.4:23; ἐν, 1Co.9:15; ἀπογραφή, Luk.2:2; ἀνάκρισις Act.25:26; ἄφεσις, Heb.9:22; ὁ νόμος, Gal.3:17; τὸ πάσχα, Mat.26:2. __4. to become, be made, come to be: with pred., Mat.4:3, Luk.4:3, Jhn.2:9, 1Co.13:11, al.; before ὡς, ὡσεί, Mat.10:25, Mrk.9:26; εἰς (M, Pr., 71f.), Mrk.12:1o, al.; with genitive Rev.11:15; id., of age, Luk.2:42; with dative, γ. ἀνδρί ([LXX for הָיָה לְאִישׁ, Rut.1:12, al. ;] see Field, Notes, 156), Rom.7:3, 4; before ἐν, Act.22:17, Rev.1:10, al.; ἐπάνω, Luk.19:19; μετά, with genitive, Mrk.16:[10], Act.9:19; before εἰς, ἐπί (Field, Notes, 135), κατά (ib., 62), with accusative of place, Act.20:16 21:35 27:7, al.; before ἐκ, Mrk.9:7, Luk.3:22, 2Th.2:7, al. Aoristic pf. γέγονα (M, Pr., 52, 145f.; Field, Notes, 1f.), Mat.25:6, Luk.10:36, al. Aor. ἐγενήθη (for ἐγένετο, M, Pr., 139f.; Mayser, 379), Mat.11:23, al. (Cf. απο-, δια-, επι-, παρα-, συμ-, παρα-, προ-.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπεκρίθη·

한글 발음: 아페크리테

apekrithē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νῦν

한글 발음: 뉜

nun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3568 원어 검색에서 보기 G3568
Lemma
νῦν
Strong
G3568
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이제/지금
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '지금, 이제'.

원문 정의 보기

νῦν, adv., [in LXX chiefly for עַתָּה ;] __1. prop., of time, now, i.e. at the present time: as opposite to past, Jhn.4:18, Act.7:52, Rom.13:11, 2Co.7:9, Col.1:24, al.; opposite to fut., Jhn.12:27, Rom.11:31, al.; with art., ὁ (ἡ, τὸ) and subst., the present: Rom.3:26, Gal.4:25, 1Ti.6:17, Tit.2:12, al.; απὸ τοῦ ν. (LXX for מֵעַתָּה), Luk.1:48, Act.18:6, al.; ἄχρι τοῦ ν., Rom.8:22, Php.1:5; ἕως τοῦ ν. (LXX for עַד עַתָּה), Mat.24:21, Mrk.13:19; τὰ ν., as regards the present, Act.5:38; with pret., just now, but now, Mat.26:65, Jhn.11:8 21:10; with fut., now, presently, Jhn.12:31, Act.20:22; so with praes., presently, forthwith, Jhn.12:31 17:13; καὶ ν., Jhn.11:22 17:5, al.; ἀλλὰ ν., Luk.22:36; ἔτι ν., 1Co.3:2; τότε (πότε) . . . ν. (δέ), Rom.6:21 11:30; ν. ἤδη, 1Jn.4:3; ν. οὖν, Act.10:33, al. __2. Of logical sequence (often difficult to disting. from the temporal sense; cf. Lft., Notes, 113f.), now, therefore, now, however, as it is: Luk.11:39; καὶ ν., Act.3:17, 2Th.2:6, 1Jn.2:28; id. before δεῦρο, Act.7:34; ν. δέ, Jhn.8:40 9:41 15:22, 24, 18:36, 1Co.5:11 7:14 12:20, al. (cf. WM, 579.11). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχον

한글 발음: 에콘

echon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAP-ASN
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πορεύου·

한글 발음: 포레우우

poreuou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4198 원어 검색에서 보기 G4198
Lemma
πορεύω
Strong
G4198
형태소
V-PNM-2S
품사
동사
가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가다, 여행하다, 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πορεύω, (πόρος, a ford, a passage), [in LXX chiefly for הלךְ ;] in cl. (the act. becomes obsolete in late Gk.; see M, Pr., 162), to cause to go over, carry, convey. Mid. (always in LXX and NT), ־ομαι, to go, proceed, go on one's way: with accusative, ὁδόν, Act.8:39; before ἐκεῖθεν, Mat.19:15; ἐντεῦθεν, Luk.13:31; ἀπό, Mat.25:41, Luk.4:42; εἰς, Mat.2:20, Mrk.16:12, Luk.1:39, Jhn.7:35, al; εἰς εἰρήνην (cf. 1Ki.1:17). Luk.7:50; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Act.16:36; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.22:9, Act.25:12, al; ἕως, Act.23:23; οὗ, Luk.24:28, 1Co.16:6; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Mat.25:9, Luk.11:5, al.; κατὰ τ. ὁδόν, Act.8:36; διά, with genitive, Mat.12:1, Mrk.9:30; with inf., Luk.2:3, Jhn.14:2; σύν, Luk.7:6, al.; ἵνα, Jhn.11:11; absol., Mat.2:9, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:50, Act.5:20, al.; ptcp., πορευθείς (on the pass. form of the aor., see M, Pr., 161f.), redundant (as in Heb. and Aram.; V. M, Pr., 231; Dalman, Words, 21), Mat.2:8, Luk.7:22, al. Metaphorical (cf. Soph., O.T., 884; Xen., Cyr., 2, 2, 24, al), __(a) like οἴχομαι in cl., as euphemism for θνήσκω (so הלךְ in Gen.15:2); Luk.22:22 and perh. also 13:33 (see Field, Notes, 66); __(b) in ethical sense (Deu.19:9, Psa.14:2, al; cf. M, Pr., 11.2; Kennedy, Sources, 107): before ἐν, Luk.1:6, 1Pe.4:3, 2Pe.2:19; κατά, with accusative, 2Pe.3:3, Ju 16, 18; with dative (Bl, §38, 3), Act.9:31 14:16, Ju 11; __(with) of disciples or partisans ( Jdg.2:12, 3Ki.11:10, Sir.46:10): before ὀπίσω, with genitive of person(s), Luk.21:8 (cf. δια-, εἰς-, (-μαι), ἐκ- (-μαι), ἐν- (-μαι), ἐπι- (-μαι), παρα- (-μαι), προ-, προσ- (-μαι), συν- (-μαι)). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καιρὸν

한글 발음: 카이론

kairon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2540 원어 검색에서 보기 G2540
Lemma
καιρός
Strong
G2540
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
때/시기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때, 적절한 시기, 기회'.

원문 정의 보기

καιρός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for עֵת, also for מוֹעֵד, etc. ;] __1. due measure, fitness, proportion (Eur., Xen., al.). __2. Of Time (cl. also) in the sense of a fixed and definite period, time, season (Kennedy, Sources, 153): Mat.11:25, Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:8, Rom.13:11, Eph.6:18, Heb.11:15, 1Pe.1:5 1:11 Rev.1:3, al.; with genitive, πειρασμοῦ Luk.8:13; τ. καρπῶν, Mat.21:34; σύκων, Mrk.11:13; pl., Mat.21:41; χρόνοι ἢ (καὶ) κ., Act.1:7, 1Th.5:1; ἐθνῶν, Luk.21:24; of opportune or seasonable time, Act.24:25, Gal.6:10, Eph.5:16, Col.4:5; with inf., Heb.11:15; ὁ κ. οὗτος, Mrk.10:30, Luk.18:30; ὁ νῦν κ. (Dalman, Words, 148), Rom.8:18; ὁ κ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.7:6; κ. δεκτῲ, 2Co.6:2 (LXX); δουλεύειν τῷ κ., Rom.12:11, R, mg.; τ. σημεῖα τῶν κ., Mat.16:3; adverbial usages: ἐν κ., Mat.24:45, 1Pe.5:6 (cf. καιρῷ, Luk.20:10; τῷ κ., Mrk.12:2); ἄχρι καιροῦ, Luk.4:13; πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; κατὰ καιρόν, Rom.5:6; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mat.8:29 SYN.: (χρόνος) time in the sense of duration (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεταλαβὼν

한글 발음: 메탈라본

metalabōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3335 원어 검색에서 보기 G3335
Lemma
μεταλαμβάνω
Strong
G3335
형태소
V-2AAP-NSM
품사
동사
받다/나눠 먹다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나눠 받다, 함께 누리다, 먹다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-λαμξάνω [in LXX: Est.5:1, Wis.18:9; 4Ma.12:1-19 * ;] to have or get a share of, partake of: with genitive of thing(s), 2Ti.2:6, Heb.6:7 12:10; τροφῆς, Act.2:46 27:33-34; with accusative of thing(s) (of the whole), to get: καιρόν, Act.24:25 (see Bl., § 36, 1; MM, xvi).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετακαλέσομαί

한글 발음: 메타칼레소마이

metakalesomai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3333 원어 검색에서 보기 G3333
Lemma
μετακαλέω
Strong
G3333
형태소
V-FMI-1S
품사
동사
불러오다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '(중간) 사람을 보내어 부르다, 청하다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-καλέω, -ῶ [in LXX: Hos.11:1-2 (קָרָא), I Est.1:50 * ;] to call from one place to another. Mid., to send for: with accusative, Act.7:14 10:32 20:17 24:25.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σε·

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
He hoped also that money should haue bene giuen him of Paul, that hee might loose him: wherefore hee sent for him the oftner, and comuned with him.

원어

ἅμα

한글 발음: 하마

hama

원어 사전 정의 보기 G260 원어 검색에서 보기 G260
Lemma
ἅμα
Strong
G260
형태소
ADV
품사
-
함께/동시에
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '함께, 동시에'.

원문 정의 보기

ἅμα adv., at once (Lat. simul): Act.24:26 27:40, Rom.3:12 (one and all = יַחַד, Psa.14:3), Col.4:3, 1Ti.5:13, Phm 22; before σύν, 1Th.4:17 5:10; as prep. with dative, together with: Mat.13:29 (see MM, VGT, see word); also, with adv., ἅ. πρωΐ (cl., ἅ. ἕω, etc.), early in the morning: Mat.20:1.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλπίζων

한글 발음: 엘피존

elpizōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1679 원어 검색에서 보기 G1679
Lemma
ἐλπίζω
Strong
G1679
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
소망하다/바라다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '소망하다, 바라다, 기대하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐλπίζω [in LXX chiefly for בָּטַח, also for חָסָה, יָחַל pi., hi., etc. ;] to look for, expect, hope (for): with accusative of thing(s), Rom.8:24-25, 1Co.13:7, Heb.11:1; with dative of thing(s) (τ. τύχῃ, Thuc., iii, 97, 2), Mat.12:21; before καθώς, 2Co.8:5; with inf., Luk.6:34 23:8, Act.26:7, Rom.15:24, 1Co.16:7, 2Co.5:11, Php.2:19, 23, 1Ti.3:14, II Jn 12, 3Jn.14; before ὅτι, with pres., Luk.24:21; with fut., Act.24:26, 2Co.1:13 13:6, Phm 22. As in LXX (WM, § xxxiii, d; and esp. in the pf., Ellic. on 1Ti.4:10; Bl., § 59, 2), with prep.; εἰς, Jhn.5:45 (see Ellis., l.with), 1Pe.3:5; before ὅτι, 2Co.1:10; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.15:12 (LXX 1Ti.4:10 6:17; ἐν, 1Co.15:19; with accusative, 1Pe.1:13 (aor. imper. see Bl., § 58, 2); τ. θεόν, 1Ti.5:5 (of. ἀπ-, προ-ελπίζω, see Cremer, 255).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χρήματα

한글 발음: 크레마타

chrēmata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5536 원어 검색에서 보기 G5536
Lemma
χρῆμα
Strong
G5536
형태소
N-NPN
품사
명사
재물/돈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '재물, 돈, 부' (복수).

원문 정의 보기

χρῆμα, -τος, τό (χράομαι) [in LXX: Jos.22:8, 2Ch.1:11-12 (נֶכֶס), Job.27:17 (כֶּסֶף), etc.; frequently in Sir (5:1, 8, al.), 2 and 4 Mac ;] a thing that one uses or needs (and generally, a matter, event, business); hence in pl., __(a) wealth, riches: οἱ τά χ. ἔχοντες, Mrk.10:23-24, Luk.18:24; __(b) money: Act.8:18, 20 24:26; sing. (rare in cl.) of a special sum of money, Act.4:37.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δοθήσεται

한글 발음: 도테세타이

dothēsetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-FPI-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπὸ

한글 발음: 휘포

hupo

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5259 원어 검색에서 보기 G5259
Lemma
ὑπό
Strong
G5259
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 의해/~아래
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 의해', 대격 '~아래'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπό (before smooth breathing ὑπ᾽, Mat.8:9b, Luk.7:8b; before rough breathing ὑφ᾽, Rom.3:9; on the neglect of elision in Mt, Lk, ll. witha, Gal.3:22, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., iv), prep. with genitive, dative (not in NT), accusative __I. C. genitive, primarily of place, under, hence, metaphorically, of the efficient cause, by: after passive verbs, with genitive of person(s), Mat.1:22, Mrk.1:5, Luk.2:18, Jhn.14:21, Act.4:11, 1Co.1:11, Heb.3:4, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Mat.8:24, Luk.7:24, Rom.3:21, al.; with neut. verbs and verbs with pass, meaning, Mat.17:12, Mrk.5:26, 1Co.10:9, 10 1Th.2:14, al. __II. C. accusative, under; __1. of motion: Mat.5:15 8:8, Mrk.4:21, Luk.13:34; hence, metaphorically, of subjection, Rom.7:14, 1Co.15:27, Gal.3:22, 1Pe.5:6, al. __2. Of position: Jhn.1:49, Act.4:12, Rom.3:13, 1Co.10:1, al.; hence, metaphorically, under, subject to, Mat.8:9, Rom.3:9, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5, al. __3. Of time, about: Act.5:21. __III. In composition: under (ὑποδέω), hence, of subjection (ὑποτάσσω), compliance (ὑπακούω), secrecy (ὑποβάλλω), diminution (ὑποπνέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Παύλου

한글 발음: 파울루

Paulou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3972 원어 검색에서 보기 G3972
Lemma
Παῦλος
Strong
G3972
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
바울
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '바울'.

원문 정의 보기

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus), __1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7. __2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅπως

한글 발음: 호포스

hopōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3704 원어 검색에서 보기 G3704
Lemma
ὅπως
Strong
G3704
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하도록
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~하도록, ~하기 위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅπως __I. Relat. adv. of manner, as, how: with indic., Luk.24:20. __II. Conj., with subjc. (in cl. also with opt., indic.: so in Mat.26:59, LT, Tr.), in order that, to the end that, that; __1. final, denoting purpose or design (in which the original idea of modality has been merged): after pres., Mat.6:2, al.; pf., Act.9:17, al.; impf., Act.9:24; aor., Act.9:2, al.; plpf., Jhn.11:57; fut., Mat.23:35; imperat., Mat.2:8, al.; ὅ. μή (M, Pr., 185), Mat.6:18, Luk.16:26, Act.20:16, 1Co.1:29; ὅ. πληρωθῇ, Mat.2:23 8:17 13:35; ὅ. ἄν (B1., § 65, 2; WM, § 42, 5), Luk.2:35, Act.3:19 15:17, Rom.3:4 (cf. Gen.12:13, Psa.59:7. 1Mac 1032, al.). __2. After verbs of asking, exhorting, etc.: Mat.9:38, Luk.7:3, Jas.5:16, al. (in late writers its place is often taken by the correl. πῶς, which see) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λύσῃ

한글 발음: 뤼세

lusē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3089 원어 검색에서 보기 G3089
Lemma
λύω
Strong
G3089
형태소
V-AAS-3S
품사
동사
풀다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '풀다, 끄르다, 폐하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λύω [in LXX for פָּתַח, נָתַר hi., etc. ;] __1. to loose, unbind, release: of things, Mrk.1:7, Luk.3:16, al.; of beasts, Mat.21:2, Luk.13:15, al.; of persons, Jhn.11:44, Act.22:30; of Satan, Rev.20:3, 7; metaphorically, of the marriage tie, 1Co.7:27; of one diseased, Luk.13:16; of release from sin, Rev.1:5, WH, R, txt. (see: λούω). __2. To resolve a whole into its parts, loosen, dissolve, break up, destroy: Jhn.2:19, Act.27:41, Rev.5:2; metaphorically, 2Pe.3:11; of an assembly, to dismiss: Act.13:43; τ. μεσότοιχον τ. φραγμοῦ, Eph.2:14; τ. στοιχεῖα, 2Pe.3:10; οὐρανοί, 2Pe.3:12; τ. ἔργα τ. διαβόλου, 1Jn.3:8; τ. ὠδῖνας τ. θανάτου, Act.2:24; of laws, etc., to break, annul, cancel (MM, xvi): ἐντολήν, Mat.5:19; τ. νόμον, Jhn.7:23; τ. σάββατον, Jhn.5:18; τ. γραφήν, Jhn.10:35. (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-λύω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν,

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὸ

한글 발음: 디오

dio

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1352 원어 검색에서 보기 G1352
Lemma
διό
Strong
G1352
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그러므로, 이런 까닭에'.

원문 정의 보기

διό conjunct. for δι᾽ ὅ, wherefore, on which account: Mat.27:8, Luk.7:7, Act.15:19, Rom.1:24, al.; δ. καί, Luk.1:35, Act.10:29 24:26, Rom.4:22 15:22, 2Co.1:20 4:13 5:9, Php.2:9, Heb.11:12 13:12 (see Ellic. on Gal.4:31). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πυκνότερον

한글 발음: 퓌크노테론

puknoteron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4437 원어 검색에서 보기 G4437
Lemma
πυκνός
Strong
G4437
형태소
A-ASN-C
품사
형용사
자주의/잦은
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '잦은, 빈번한'; 부사 '자주'.

원문 정의 보기

πυκιός, -ή, -όν [in LXX: Eze.31:3 A (חֹרֶשׁ), 3Ma.1:28 3Mac 4:10, 4Ma.12:12 * ;] __1. close, compact, solid. __2. frequent: 1Ti.5:23. Neut. pl., πυκνά, as adv., much, often: Mrk.7:3 Τ (see: πυγμή), Luk.5:33. Comparat., πυκνότερον, very often or so much the oftener (seeBl., § 44, 3,): Act.24:26.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεταπεμπόμενος

한글 발음: 메타펨포메노스

metapempomenos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3343 원어 검색에서 보기 G3343
Lemma
μεταπέμπω
Strong
G3343
형태소
V-PMP-NSM
품사
동사
사람을 보내 부르다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '(중간) 사람을 보내어 청하다, 불러오다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-πέμπω [in LXX (mid.) : Gen.27:45 (לָקַח), Num.23:7 (נָחָה: hi.), 2Ma.15:31, 3Ma.5:18 R, 4Ma.12:3 4Mac 12:6 * ;] to send after or for: pass., Act.10:29 a. Chiefly in mid., to send for, summon Act.10:5, 22 10:29 b Act.11:13 20:1 24:24, 26 25:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡμίλει

한글 발음: 호밀레이

hōmilei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3656 원어 검색에서 보기 G3656
Lemma
ὁμιλέω
Strong
G3656
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
이야기하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '담화하다, 함께 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ὁμιλέω, -ῶ (ὅμιλος), [in LXX: Pro.5:19 (רָוָה pi.), al. ;] to be in company with, consort with; hence, to converse with: Act.20:11; with dative, Act.24:26; before πρός, Luk.24:14-15.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ.¶

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But after two yeeres, Portius Festus came into Felix roome: and Felix willing to shew the Iewes a pleasure, left Paul bound.

원어

Διετίας

한글 발음: 디에티아스

Dietias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1333 원어 검색에서 보기 G1333
Lemma
διετία
Strong
G1333
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
이태
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '두 해, 이태'.

원문 정의 보기

διετία, -ας, ἡ (διετής), [in LXX (Græc. Ven.): Gen.41:1 45:5 * ;] the space of two years: Act.24:27 28:30.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πληρωθείσης

한글 발음: 플레로테이세스

plērōtheisēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4137 원어 검색에서 보기 G4137
Lemma
πληρόω
Strong
G4137
형태소
V-APP-GSF
품사
동사
채우다/이루다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '채우다, 가득하게 하다, 이루다(성취)'.

원문 정의 보기

πληρόω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for מָלֵא ;] __1. to fill, make full, fill to the full, with accusative; __(a) of things : pass. (σαψήνη, φάραγξ), Mat.13:48, Luk.3:5" (LXX) ; figuratively, Mat.23:32; but chiefly of immaterial things: πᾶσαν χρείαν, Php.4:19; ἦχος ἐλήρωσε τ. οἶκον, Act.2:2; with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.5:28; pass., before ἐκ, Jhn.12:3 (cf. B1., § 36, 4); π. τ. καρδίαν, Jhn.16:6, Act.5:3; metaphorically, of the all-pervading activity of Christ, Eph.4:10; mid., Eph.1:23; __(b) of persons: to fill with, cause to abound in : with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.2:28 (LXX), Rom.15:13; pass., to be filled with, abound in: Eph.3:19, Php.4:18; with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.13:52, Rom.15:14, 2Ti.1:4; with dative (Æsch., al.), Luk.2:40 (with genitive, T), Rom.1:29, 2Co.7:4; with accusative (so in π., see MM, xx), Php.1:11, Col.1:9; before ἐν, Eph.5:18, Col.2:10. __2. to complete; __(a) to complete, fulfil: of number, Rev.6:11, WH, tat.; of time (MM, xx), Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:24, Jhn.7:8, Act.7:23, 30 9:23 24:27; ἐυδοκίαν, 2Th.1:11; τ. χαράν, Php.2:2; pass., Jhn.3:29 15:11 16:24 17:13, 1Jn.1:4, 2Jn.12; τ. ἔργα, Rev.3:2; ἡ ὑπακυή, 2Co.10:6; τ. πάσχα, Luk.22:16; __(b) to execute, accomplish, carry out to the full: Mat.3:15, Luk.7:1 9:31, Act.12:25 13:25 14:26 19:21, Rom.8:4 13:8 15:19, Gal.5:14, Col.1:25 4:17, Rev.6:11, T, WH, R, mg.; __(with) of sayings, prophecies, etc., to bring to pass, fulfil: Mat.1:22 2:15, 17 2:23 4:14 5:17 8:17 12:17 13:35 21:4 26:54, 56 27:9, Mrk.14:49 15:28 (WH, R, txt. om.), Luk.1:20 4:21 24:44, Jhn.12:38 13:18 15:25 17:12 18:9, 32 19:24, 36, Act.1:16 3:18 13:27, Jas.2:23 (cf. Lft., Col., 255 ff.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλαβεν

한글 발음: 엘라벤

elaben

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2983 원어 검색에서 보기 G2983
Lemma
λαμβάνω
Strong
G2983
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
받다/취하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '받다, 취하다, 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαμβάνω, [in LXX chiefly for לקח, also for אחז ,לכד ,נשׂא, etc. ;] __1. to take, lay hold of: absol., Mat.26:26, Mrk.14:22; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.5:40 26:52, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.21:35, Mrk.12:3, al.; pleonastic λαβών (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mat.13:31 14:19, al.; so also indic., Mrk.7:27, Jhn.19:1, 40 Rev.8:5, al.; metaphorically, with accusative of thing(s), ἀφορμήν, Rom.7:8, 11; ὑδόδειγμα, Jas.5:10; id. with accusative of person(s), φόβος, Luk.7:16; πνεῦμα, Luk.9:39; πειρασμός, 1Co.10:13; aoristic pf. (M, Pr., 145, 238; BL, §59, 4), Rev.5:7 8:5, al. __2. to receive: absol., opposite to αἰτεῖν, Mat.7:8, al.; διδόναι, Mat.10:8, Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.27:6, Mrk.10:3o, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.6:21 13:20 19:27, 2Jo.10; ῥαπίσμασιν (a vulgarism; Bl., §38, 3), Mrk.14:65; metaphorically, τ. λόγον, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16; τ. μαρτυρίαν, Jhn.3:11; τ. ῥήματα, Jhn.12:48; πρόσωπον (Heb. נָשָׂא פָּנִים, Dalman, Words, 30), Luk.20:21, Gal.2:6; ζωὴν αἰώνιον (Dalman, op. cit., 124f.), Mrk.10:30 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀντι-, συν-αντι- (-μαι), ἀπο-, ἐπι-, κατα-, μετα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, συν-περι-, ὑπο-λαμβάνω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διάδοχον

한글 발음: 디아도콘

diadochon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1240 원어 검색에서 보기 G1240
Lemma
διάδοχος
Strong
G1240
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
후임자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '후임자, 계승자'.

원문 정의 보기

διά-δοχος, -ου, ὁ, ἡ (διαδέχομαι), [in LXX: 1Ch.18:17 (לְיַד), 2Ch.26:11 (שַׂר) 28:7 (מִשְׁנֶה), Sir.46:1 48:8, 2Ma.4:29 14:26 * ;] a successor: Act.24:27 (for usage in LXX and π. in sense of court official, see Deiss., BS, 115).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Πόρκιον

한글 발음: 포르키온

Porkion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4201 원어 검색에서 보기 G4201
Lemma
Πόρκιος
Strong
G4201
형태소
N-ASM-P
품사
명사
보르기오
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '보르기오'. 베스도의 이름.

원문 정의 보기

Πόρκιος, -ου, ὁ Porcius, prænomen of Porcius Festus (see: Φῆστος): Act.24:27.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆστον,

한글 발음: 페스톤

Phēston

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5347 원어 검색에서 보기 G5347
Lemma
Φῆστος
Strong
G5347
형태소
N-ASM-P
품사
명사
베스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '베스도'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆστος, -ου, ὁ (Porcius), Festus, procurator of Judæa: Act.24:27 25:1 ff. Act.26:24-25, 32.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θέλων

한글 발음: 텔론

thelōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2309 원어 검색에서 보기 G2309
Lemma
θέλω
Strong
G2309
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
원하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원하다, 바라다, ~하려 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τε

한글 발음: 테

te

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5037 원어 검색에서 보기 G5037
Lemma
τε
Strong
G5037
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/~도
번역 정렬
-

정의

후접 접속사 '그리고, ~와, ~도'. (τε...καί '~도 ~도').

원문 정의 보기

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. __1. τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. __2. Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ . . . ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χάριτα

한글 발음: 카리타

charita

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5485 원어 검색에서 보기 G5485
Lemma
χάρις
Strong
G5485
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
은혜
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '은혜, 호의, 감사'.

원문 정의 보기

χάρις, -ιτος, ἡ Abbott-Smith does not include the article here., accusative, χάριν (χάριτα in Act.24:27, Ju 4; see WH, App., 157), [in LXX chiefly for חֵן ;] __1. objectively, that which causes favourable regard, gracefulness, grace, loveliness of form, graciousness of speech (cl.; Ecc.10:12, Sir.21:16, al.): Col.4:6; λόγοι τ. χάριτος (genitive qual.), Luk.4:22. __2. Subjectively, __(a) on the part of the giver, grace, graciousness, kindness, goodwill, favour: Luk.2:52, Act.7:10, al.; esp. in NT of the divine favour, grace, with emphasis on its freeness and universality: Luk.1:30, Act.14:26, Rom.1:7, 1Co.1:3, al.; opposite to ὀφείλημα, Rom.4:4, 16; to ἔργα, Rom.11:6; __(b) on the part of the receiver, a sense of favour received, thanks, gratitude: Rom.6:17 7:25, al.; χ. ἔχειν, to be thankful, Luk.17:9, 1Ti.1:12, al. __3. Objectively, of the effect of grace, __(a) a state of grace: Rom.5:2, 2Ti.2:1, 1Pe.5:12, 2Pe.3:18; __(b) a proof or gift of grace (cl., a favour): Jhn.1:16, Act.6:8, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:10, 2Co.9:8, Gal.2:9, Eph.3:2, 1Pe.5:5, 10 al. (For fuller treatment of the NT usage, see AR, Eph., 221ff.; DB, ii, 254ff.; DCG, i, 686ff.; Cremer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καταθέσθαι

한글 발음: 카타테스타이

katathesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2698 원어 검색에서 보기 G2698
Lemma
κατατίθημι
Strong
G2698
형태소
V-2AMN
품사
동사
맡기다/얻다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '내려놓다, 맡기다'. (중간) '환심을 얻다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατα-τίθημι [in LXX: 1Ch.21:27 שׁוּב hi.), Psa.41:8 (יָצַק), 1Ma.10:23, al. ;] to lay down, deposit, lay by: Mrk.15:46, T; mid., to lay up for oneself: χάριν (Hdt., al., see LS, see word), with dative of person(s), Act.24:27 25:9.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίοις

한글 발음: 이우다이오이스

Ioudaiois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-DPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φῆλιξ

한글 발음: 펠릭스

Phēlix

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5344 원어 검색에서 보기 G5344
Lemma
Φῆλιξ
Strong
G5344
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
벨릭스
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '벨릭스'.

원문 정의 보기

φῆλιξ (L, Φή-), -ικος, ὁ Felix, procurator of Judæa: Act.23:24, 26 24:3, 22 24:24-25, 27 25:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατέλιπεν

한글 발음: 카텔리펜

katelipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2641 원어 검색에서 보기 G2641
Lemma
καταλείπω
Strong
G2641
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
남겨두다/버려두다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '뒤에 남기다, 버려두다, 떠나다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατα-λείπω [in LXX chiefly far שָׁאַר, ni., hi., also for עָזַב, יָתַר, etc. ;] __1 1, to leave behind, leave: with accusative of person(s) (of thing(s)), Mat.4:13, Mrk.12:19, 21, Luk.20:31, Act.24:27 25:14, Heb.11:27; of sailing by a place, Act.21:3; ptcp., καταλιπών, redundant (Dalman, Words, 21 f.), Mat.16:4 21:17; pass., Jhn.8:9, 1Th.3:1; metaphorically, εὐθεῖαν ὁδόν, 2Pe.2:15. __2. to forsake, abandon: Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:7" (LXX) Mrk.14:52, Luk.5:28 15:4, Act.6:2, Eph.5:31" (LXX) . __3. to leave remaining, reserve: with accusative and inf., Luk.10:40; ἐμαυτῷ, Rom.11:4 (LXX); pass., Heb.4:1 (cf. ἐν-κατα-λείπω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Παῦλον

한글 발음: 파울론

Paulon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3972 원어 검색에서 보기 G3972
Lemma
Παῦλος
Strong
G3972
형태소
N-ASM-P
품사
명사
바울
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '바울'.

원문 정의 보기

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus), __1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7. __2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δεδεμένον.¶

한글 발음: 데데메논

dedemenon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1210 원어 검색에서 보기 G1210
Lemma
δέω
Strong
G1210
형태소
V-RPP-ASM
품사
동사
매다/묶다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '매다, 묶다, 결박하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δέω (I), [in LXX chiefly for אסר ;] to tie, bind, fasten; __(1) with accusative of thing(s), before εἰς δεσμάς, Mat.13:30; of an ass, Mat.21:2, Mrk.11:2, 4 Luk.19:30. __(2) with accusative of person(s), of swathing a dead body, ὀθονίοις, Jhn.19:40; δεδομένος τ. πόδας . . . κειρίαις (Bl., §34, 6; Kühner 3, iii, 125), Jhn.11:44; of binding with chains, ἀγγέλους, Rev.9:14; a demoniac, πέδαις κ. ἁλύσεσι, Mrk.5:3, 4; captives, Mat.12:29 14:3 22:13 27:2, Mrk.3:27 6:17 15:1, 7, Jhn.18:12, 24, Act.9:2, 14, 21, 21:11, 13 22:5, 29 24:27, Col.4:3, Rev.20:2; ἁλύσεσι, Act.12:6 21:33. Metaphorical, ὁ λόγος τ. Θεοῦ, 2Ti.2:9; of Satan binding by disease (MM, see word), Luk.13:16; of constraint or obligation, Act.20:22; of the marriage bond, 1Co.7:39; id. with dative of person(s), ἀνδρί, Rom.7:2; γυναικί, 1Co.7:27; in Rabbinic lang. (Dalman, Words, 213f.), to forbid, declare forbidden, Mat.16:19 18:18 (cf. κατα-, περι-, συν-, ὐπο-δέω; Cremer, 82). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

이 장의 주석

해설, 라벨, 범위 설명, 음성 강의처럼 본문 흐름에 붙은 주석을 모아 봅니다.

공개 주석

선택한 주석 세트에 이 장의 구조 주석이 없습니다.

질문과 답변

이 장을 읽으며 남긴 질문, 코멘트, 작성자 답변입니다.

기본 주석

로그인 후 질문이나 코멘트를 남길 수 있습니다.

아직 등록된 질문이나 코멘트가 없습니다.